]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blame - gcc/cse.c
(storehinhww): Use inhw not inbyte.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
CommitLineData
7afe21cc
RK
1/* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9any later version.
10
11GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21#include "config.h"
22#include "rtl.h"
23#include "regs.h"
24#include "hard-reg-set.h"
25#include "flags.h"
26#include "real.h"
27#include "insn-config.h"
28#include "recog.h"
29
30#include <stdio.h>
31#include <setjmp.h>
32
33/* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
34 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
35 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
36 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
37
38 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
39 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
40 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
41 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
42 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
43 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
44 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
45
46 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
47 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
48 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
49
50 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
51 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
52 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
53 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
54 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
55 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
56 information recorded on an expression other than a register
57 is to keep it in a hash table.
58
59Registers and "quantity numbers":
60
61 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
62 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
63 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
64 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
65 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
66 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
67 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
68 of as containing.
69
70 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
71 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
72
73 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
74 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
75
76 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
77 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
78 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
79
80 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
81 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
82 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
83
84 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
85 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
86 registers and must be in the same class.
87
88 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
89 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
90 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
91 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
92
93Constants and quantity numbers
94
95 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
96 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
97 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
98
d45cf215 99 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
7afe21cc
RK
100 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
101 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
102
103 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
104 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
105 of qty_const.
106
107 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
108 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
109 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
110 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
111 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
112
113Other expressions:
114
115 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
116 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
117 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
118 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
119 hash codes.
120
121 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
122 currently have equivalent values.
123
124 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
125 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
126 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
127 number, not the register number.
128
129 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
130 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
131 could be different as a result.
132
133 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
134 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
135 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
136 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
137
138 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
139 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
140 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
141 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
142 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
143 All expressions that refer to non-constant
144 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
145
146 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
147 containing references to that register, and only those,
148 must be removed.
149
150 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
151 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
152 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
153 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
154 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
155 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
156 within any one basic block.
157
158 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
159 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
160 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
161 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
162 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
163 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
164 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
165 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
166
167 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
168 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
169 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
170 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
171 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
172 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
173 the register.
174
175 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
176 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
177 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
178
179Related expressions:
180
181 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
182 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
183 the table, the related expression with no constant term
184 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
185 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
186 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
187
188/* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
189
190static int max_reg;
191
192/* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
193 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
194
195static int max_qty;
196
197/* Next quantity number to be allocated.
198 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
199
200static int next_qty;
201
202/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
203 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
204
205static int *qty_first_reg;
206static int *qty_last_reg;
207
208/* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
209
210static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
211
212/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
213 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
214 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
215 can also be entered here. */
216
217static rtx *qty_const;
218
219/* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
220 recorded in `qty_const'. */
221
222static rtx *qty_const_insn;
223
224/* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
225 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
226 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
227 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
228
229/* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
230 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
231static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
232
233/* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
234 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
235 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
236
237static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
238
239/* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
240 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
241 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
242
243static int *qty_comparison_qty;
244
245#ifdef HAVE_cc0
246/* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
247 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
248 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
249
250 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
251 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
252 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
253 the constant should be interpreted. */
254
255static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
256static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
257#endif
258
259/* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
260
261static rtx prev_insn;
262
263/* Insn being scanned. */
264
265static rtx this_insn;
266
267/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
268 of the register's current contents. */
269
270static int *reg_qty;
271
272/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
273 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
274 value.
275
276 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
277
278 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
279
280static int *reg_next_eqv;
281static int *reg_prev_eqv;
282
283/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
284 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
285
286static int *reg_tick;
287
288/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
289 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
290 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
291 existing in the hash table are invalid.
292 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
293 entered in the table. */
294
295static int *reg_in_table;
296
297/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
298 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
299 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
300 expression in the table. */
301
302static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
303
304/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
305 by a CALL_INSN. */
306
307static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
308
309/* Two vectors of ints:
310 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
311 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
312 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
313
314static int *all_minus_one;
315static int *consec_ints;
316
317/* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
318
319static int cse_basic_block_start;
320
321/* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
322
323static int cse_basic_block_end;
324
325/* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
d45cf215 326 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
7afe21cc
RK
327 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
328
329static short *uid_cuid;
330
331/* Get the cuid of an insn. */
332
333#define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
334
335/* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
336 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
337
338static int cse_jumps_altered;
339
340/* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
341 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
342 subexpression. */
343
344static int do_not_record;
345
346/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
347 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
348
349static int hash_arg_in_memory;
350
351/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
352 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
353
354static int hash_arg_in_struct;
355
356/* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
357 each recording one expression's information.
358 That expression is in the `exp' field.
359
360 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
361 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
362
363 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
364 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
365 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
366 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
367 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
368 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
369
370 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
371 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
372 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
373 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
374 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
375 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
376
377 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
378 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
379
380 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
381 (that differ by adding an integer).
382 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
383 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
384 chain is not useful.
385
386 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
387
388 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
389 a fixed address).
390
391 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
392
393 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
394 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
395 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
396 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
397
398
399struct table_elt
400{
401 rtx exp;
402 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
403 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
404 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
405 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
406 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
407 struct table_elt *related_value;
408 int cost;
409 enum machine_mode mode;
410 char in_memory;
411 char in_struct;
412 char is_const;
413 char flag;
414};
415
416#define HASHBITS 16
417
418/* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
419 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
420 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
421#define NBUCKETS 31
422
423/* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
424 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
425
426#define HASH(X, M) \
427 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
428 ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS) \
429 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
430
431/* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
432 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
433 non-fixed hard regs.
434 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
435 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
436#ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
437#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
438 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N]) \
439 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
440#else
441#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
442 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
443#endif
444
445/* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
446 hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0. Next come pseudos
447 with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2. Aside
448 from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
449
450#define COST(X) \
451 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
452 ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
453 : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X)) \
454 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
455 : 2) \
e5f6a288 456 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
7afe21cc
RK
457
458/* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
459 into the `qty_...' variables. */
460
461#define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
462
463static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
464
465/* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
466 but currently removed from the table. */
467
468static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
469
470/* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
471
472static int n_elements_made;
473
474/* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
475 for functions previously processed. */
476
477static int max_elements_made;
478
479/* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
480 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
481 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
482
483static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
484
485/* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
486 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
487 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
488 the insn. */
489
490static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
491
492/* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
493 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
494 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
495 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
496 bits are also set.
497
498 Here is how the bits are set:
499 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
500 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
501 writing in a structure element at variable address
502 invalidates all but scalar variables,
503 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
504
505struct write_data
506{
507 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
508 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
509 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
510 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
511};
512
513/* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
514 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
515 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
516
517#define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
518 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
519 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
520 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
521 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
522 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
523 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
524 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
525 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
526
6f90e075
JW
527/* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
528
529 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
530 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
531 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
7afe21cc
RK
532
533#define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
6f90e075
JW
534 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx \
535 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
536 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
537 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
538 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
539 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
540 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
541 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
7afe21cc
RK
542 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
543 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
544 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
545 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
546 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
547 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
548 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
549
550static struct table_elt *lookup ();
551static void free_element ();
552
553static int insert_regs ();
554static void rehash_using_reg ();
555static void remove_invalid_refs ();
556static int exp_equiv_p ();
557int refers_to_p ();
558int refers_to_mem_p ();
559static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
560static int safe_hash ();
561static int canon_hash ();
562static rtx fold_rtx ();
563static rtx equiv_constant ();
564static void record_jump_cond ();
565static void note_mem_written ();
566static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
567static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
568static void cse_insn ();
569static void cse_set_around_loop ();
570\f
571/* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
572 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
573 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
574 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
575
576/* Return the right cost to give to an operation
577 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
578 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
579
580#define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
581
582int
e5f6a288 583rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
7afe21cc 584 rtx x;
e5f6a288 585 enum rtx_code outer_code;
7afe21cc
RK
586{
587 register int i, j;
588 register enum rtx_code code;
589 register char *fmt;
590 register int total;
591
592 if (x == 0)
593 return 0;
594
595 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
596 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
597
598 code = GET_CODE (x);
599 switch (code)
600 {
601 case MULT:
602 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
603 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
604 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
605 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
606 total = 2;
607 else
608 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
609 break;
610 case DIV:
611 case UDIV:
612 case MOD:
613 case UMOD:
614 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
615 break;
616 case USE:
617 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
618 total = 0;
619 break;
538b78e7
RS
620 case ASM_OPERANDS:
621 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
622 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
623 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
624 total = 1000;
625 break;
7afe21cc
RK
626 default:
627 total = 2;
628 }
629
630 switch (code)
631 {
632 case REG:
633 return 1;
634 case SUBREG:
fc3ffe83
RK
635 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
636 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
637 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
638 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
639 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
7afe21cc
RK
640 return 2;
641#ifdef RTX_COSTS
e5f6a288 642 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc 643#endif
e5f6a288 644 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc
RK
645 }
646
647 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
648 which is already in total. */
649
650 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
651 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
652 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
e5f6a288 653 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
7afe21cc
RK
654 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
655 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
e5f6a288 656 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
7afe21cc
RK
657
658 return total;
659}
660\f
661/* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
662 for a new basic block. */
663
664static void
665new_basic_block ()
666{
667 register int i;
668
669 next_qty = max_reg;
670
671 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
672
673 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
674 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
675 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
676
677 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
678 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
679
680 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
681 {
682 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
683 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
684 {
685 next = this->next_same_hash;
686 free_element (this);
687 }
688 }
689
690 bzero (table, sizeof table);
691
692 prev_insn = 0;
693
694#ifdef HAVE_cc0
695 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
696#endif
697}
698
699/* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
700 and initialize that quantity. */
701
702static void
703make_new_qty (reg)
704 register int reg;
705{
706 register int q;
707
708 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
709 abort ();
710
711 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
712 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
713 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
714 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
715 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
716
717 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
718}
719
720/* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
721 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
722
723static void
724make_regs_eqv (new, old)
725 register int new, old;
726{
727 register int lastr, firstr;
728 register int q = reg_qty[old];
729
730 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
731 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
732 abort ();
733
734 reg_qty[new] = q;
735 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
736 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
737
738 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
739 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
740 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
741 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
742 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
743 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
744 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
830a38ee 745 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
7afe21cc
RK
746 either. */
747 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
748 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
749 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
750 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
751 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
752 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
753 < cse_basic_block_start))
754 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
755 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
756 {
757 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
758 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
759 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
760 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
761 }
762 else
763 {
764 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
765 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
766 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
767 equivalent for anything. */
768 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
769 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
770 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
771 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
772 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
773 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
774 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
775 else
776 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
777 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
778 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
779 }
780}
781
782/* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
783
784static void
785delete_reg_equiv (reg)
786 register int reg;
787{
788 register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
789 register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
790 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
791
792 /* If invalid, do nothing. N and P above are undefined in that case. */
793 if (q == reg)
794 return;
795
796 if (n != -1)
797 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
798 else
799 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
800 if (p != -1)
801 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
802 else
803 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
804
805 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
806}
807
808/* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
809 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
810
811 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
812 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
813
814 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
815 is being stored in the table.
816
817 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
818 of X. */
819
820static int
821mention_regs (x)
822 rtx x;
823{
824 register enum rtx_code code;
825 register int i, j;
826 register char *fmt;
827 register int changed = 0;
828
829 if (x == 0)
e5f6a288 830 return 0;
7afe21cc
RK
831
832 code = GET_CODE (x);
833 if (code == REG)
834 {
835 register int regno = REGNO (x);
836 register int endregno
837 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
838 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
839 int i;
840
841 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
842 {
843 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
844 remove_invalid_refs (i);
845
846 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
847 }
848
849 return 0;
850 }
851
852 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
853 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
854 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
855 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
856
857 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
858 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
859 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
860 use of the register is in the comparison. */
861
862 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
863 {
864 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
865 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
866 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), 0, 0))
867 {
868 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
869 changed = 1;
870 }
871
872 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
873 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
874 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), 0, 0))
875 {
876 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
877 changed = 1;
878 }
879 }
880
881 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
882 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
883 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
884 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
885 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
886 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
887 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
888
889 return changed;
890}
891
892/* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
893 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
894 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
895 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
896 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
897 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
898
899 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
900 so X's hash code may be different. */
901
902static int
903insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
904 rtx x;
905 struct table_elt *classp;
906 int modified;
907{
908 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
909 {
910 register int regno = REGNO (x);
911
912 if (modified
913 || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
914 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
915 {
916 if (classp)
917 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
918 classp != 0;
919 classp = classp->next_same_value)
920 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
921 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
922 {
923 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
924 return 1;
925 }
926
927 make_new_qty (regno);
928 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
929 return 1;
930 }
931 }
c610adec
RK
932
933 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
934 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
935 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
936 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
937 a quantity number now. */
938
939 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
940 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
941 {
942 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), 0, 0);
943 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
944 return 1;
945 }
7afe21cc
RK
946 else
947 return mention_regs (x);
948}
949\f
950/* Look in or update the hash table. */
951
952/* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
953
954static void
955free_element (elt)
956 struct table_elt *elt;
957{
958 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
959 free_element_chain = elt;
960}
961
962/* Return an element that is free for use. */
963
964static struct table_elt *
965get_element ()
966{
967 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
968 if (elt)
969 {
970 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
971 return elt;
972 }
973 n_elements_made++;
974 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
975}
976
977/* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
978 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
979 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
980 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
981
982static void
983remove_from_table (elt, hash)
984 register struct table_elt *elt;
985 int hash;
986{
987 if (elt == 0)
988 return;
989
990 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
991 elt->first_same_value = 0;
992
993 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
994
995 {
996 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
997 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
998
999 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1000
1001 if (prev)
1002 prev->next_same_value = next;
1003 else
1004 {
1005 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1006 while (next)
1007 {
1008 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1009 next = next->next_same_value;
1010 }
1011 }
1012 }
1013
1014 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1015
1016 {
1017 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1018 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1019
1020 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1021
1022 if (prev)
1023 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1024 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1025 table[hash] = next;
1026 else
1027 {
1028 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1029 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1030 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1031 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1032 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1033 if (table[hash] == elt)
1034 table[hash] = next;
1035 }
1036 }
1037
1038 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1039
1040 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1041 {
1042 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1043 while (p->related_value != elt)
1044 p = p->related_value;
1045 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1046 if (p->related_value == p)
1047 p->related_value = 0;
1048 }
1049
1050 free_element (elt);
1051}
1052
1053/* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1054 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1055
1056 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1057 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1058
1059 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1060 looks like X. */
1061
1062static struct table_elt *
1063lookup (x, hash, mode)
1064 rtx x;
1065 int hash;
1066 enum machine_mode mode;
1067{
1068 register struct table_elt *p;
1069
1070 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1071 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1072 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1073 return p;
1074
1075 return 0;
1076}
1077
1078/* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1079 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1080
1081static struct table_elt *
1082lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1083 rtx x;
1084 int hash;
1085 enum machine_mode mode;
1086{
1087 register struct table_elt *p;
1088
1089 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1090 {
1091 int regno = REGNO (x);
1092 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1093 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1094 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1095 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1096 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1097 return p;
1098 }
1099 else
1100 {
1101 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1102 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1103 return p;
1104 }
1105
1106 return 0;
1107}
1108
1109/* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1110 If one is found, return that expression. */
1111
1112static rtx
1113lookup_as_function (x, code)
1114 rtx x;
1115 enum rtx_code code;
1116{
1117 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1118 GET_MODE (x));
1119 if (p == 0)
1120 return 0;
1121
1122 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1123 {
1124 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1125 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1126 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1127 return p->exp;
1128 }
1129
1130 return 0;
1131}
1132
1133/* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1134 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1135 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1136 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1137 the order cheapest first.
1138
1139 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1140 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1141
1142 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1143 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1144 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1145 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
830a38ee 1146 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
7afe21cc
RK
1147
1148 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1149 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1150
1151 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1152 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1153 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1154
1155 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1156
1157#define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1158
1159static struct table_elt *
1160insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1161 register rtx x;
1162 register struct table_elt *classp;
1163 int hash;
1164 enum machine_mode mode;
1165{
1166 register struct table_elt *elt;
1167
1168 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1169 something is wrong. */
1170 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1171 abort ();
1172
1173 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1174 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1175 {
1176 int regno = REGNO (x);
1177 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1178 int i;
1179
1180 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1181 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1182 }
1183
1184
1185 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1186
1187 elt = get_element ();
1188 elt->exp = x;
1189 elt->cost = COST (x);
1190 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1191 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1192 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1193 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1194 elt->related_value = 0;
1195 elt->in_memory = 0;
1196 elt->mode = mode;
1197 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1198 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1199 (and other const values). */
1200 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1201 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1202 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1203 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1204
1205 if (table[hash])
1206 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1207 table[hash] = elt;
1208
1209 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1210 if (classp)
1211 {
1212 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1213 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1214 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1215 {
1216 register struct table_elt *p;
1217 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1218 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1219 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1220
1221 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1222 p->first_same_value = elt;
1223 }
1224 else
1225 {
1226 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1227 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1228 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1229 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1230 p = next);
1231 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1232 elt->next_same_value = next;
1233 if (next)
1234 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1235 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1236 p->next_same_value = elt;
1237 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1238 }
1239 }
1240 else
1241 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1242
1243 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1244 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1245
1246 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1247 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1248 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1249 inserted).
1250
1251 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1252 constant, we must check the entire class.
1253
1254 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1255 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1256 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1257
1258 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1259 {
1260 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1261 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1262 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1263 }
1264
1265 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1266 {
1267 register struct table_elt *p;
1268
1269 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1270 {
1271 if (p->is_const)
1272 {
1273 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1274 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1275 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1276 break;
1277 }
1278 }
1279 }
1280
1281 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1282 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1283 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1284
1285 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1286 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1287 link it up with related expressions. */
1288 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1289 {
1290 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1291 int subhash;
1292 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1293
1294 if (subexp != 0)
1295 {
1296 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1297 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1298 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1299 if (subelt == 0)
1300 subelt = insert (subexp, 0, subhash, mode);
1301 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1302 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1303 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1304 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1305 subelt_prev = subelt;
1306 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1307 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1308 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1309 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1310 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1311 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1312 }
1313 }
1314
1315 return elt;
1316}
1317\f
1318/* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1319 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1320 the two classes equivalent.
1321
1322 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1323 call.
1324
1325 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1326
1327static void
1328merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1329 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1330{
1331 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1332
1333 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1334 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1335 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1336
1337 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1338 if (class1 == class2)
1339 return;
1340
1341 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1342 {
1343 int hash;
1344 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1345 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1346
1347 next = elt->next_same_value;
1348
1349 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1350 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1351 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1352 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1353 {
1354 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1355 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1356 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1357
1358 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1359 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1360
1361 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1362
1363 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1364 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1365 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1366 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1367 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1368 }
1369 }
1370}
1371\f
1372/* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1373 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1374 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1375 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1376 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1377 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1378
1379 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1380 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1381 a numeric offset. */
1382
1383static void
1384invalidate (x)
1385 rtx x;
1386{
1387 register int i;
1388 register struct table_elt *p;
1389 register rtx base;
1390 register int start, end;
1391
1392 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1393 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1394 Just change the qty number of the register,
1395 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1396 and remove it itself. */
1397
1398 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1399 {
1400 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1401 register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1402
1403 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1404 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1405 entry from the hash table.
1406
1407 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1408 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1409 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1410 overlap these registers. */
1411
1412 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1413 reg_tick[regno]++;
1414
1415 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1416 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1417 else
1418 {
1419 int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1420 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1421 int tregno, tendregno;
1422 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1423
1424 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1425
1426 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1427 {
1428 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1429 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1430 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1431 reg_tick[i]++;
1432 }
1433
1434 if (in_table)
1435 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1436 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1437 {
1438 next = p->next_same_hash;
1439
1440 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1441 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1442 continue;
1443
1444 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1445 tendregno
1446 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1447 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1448 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1449 }
1450 }
1451
1452 return;
1453 }
1454
1455 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1456 {
1457 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1458 abort ();
1459 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1460 return;
1461 }
1462
1463 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1464 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1465 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1466
1467 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1468 abort ();
1469 base = XEXP (x, 0);
1470 start = 0;
1471
1472 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
1473 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
1474 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
1475 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
1476 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
1477 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
1478 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
1479 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1480 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
1481 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
1482 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
1483 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
1484 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
1485 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
1486 {
1487 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1488 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
1489 }
1490
1491 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
1492 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1493 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1494 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
1495 {
1496 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1497 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1498 }
1499
1500 end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
1501 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1502 {
1503 register struct table_elt *next;
1504 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1505 {
1506 next = p->next_same_hash;
1507 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1508 remove_from_table (p, i);
1509 }
1510 }
1511}
1512
1513/* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1514 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1515 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1516 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1517
1518static void
1519remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1520 int regno;
1521{
1522 register int i;
1523 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1524
1525 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1526 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1527 {
1528 next = p->next_same_hash;
1529 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1530 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, 0))
1531 remove_from_table (p, i);
1532 }
1533}
1534\f
1535/* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1536 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1537
1538 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1539
1540static void
1541rehash_using_reg (x)
1542 rtx x;
1543{
1544 int i;
1545 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1546 int hash;
1547
1548 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1549 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1550
1551 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1552 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1553
1554 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1555 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1556 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1557 return;
1558
1559 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1560 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1561 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1562
1563 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1564 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1565 {
1566 next = p->next_same_hash;
1567 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
538b78e7 1568 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
7afe21cc
RK
1569 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1570 {
1571 if (p->next_same_hash)
1572 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1573
1574 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1575 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1576 else
1577 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1578
1579 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1580 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1581 if (table[hash])
1582 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1583 table[hash] = p;
1584 }
1585 }
1586}
1587\f
1588/* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1589 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1590
1591static void
1592invalidate_memory (writes)
1593 struct write_data *writes;
1594{
1595 register int i;
1596 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1597 int all = writes->all;
1598 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1599
1600 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1601 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1602 {
1603 next = p->next_same_hash;
1604 if (p->in_memory
1605 && (all
1606 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1607 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1608 remove_from_table (p, i);
1609 }
1610}
1611\f
1612/* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1613 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1614
1615static void
1616invalidate_for_call ()
1617{
1618 int regno, endregno;
1619 int i;
1620 int hash;
1621 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1622 int in_table = 0;
1623
1624 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1625 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1626 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1627 in the table. */
1628
1629 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1630 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1631 {
1632 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1633 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1634 reg_tick[regno]++;
1635
1636 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1637 }
1638
1639 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1640 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1641 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1642
1643 if (in_table)
1644 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1645 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1646 {
1647 next = p->next_same_hash;
1648
1649 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1650 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1651 continue;
1652
1653 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1654 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1655
1656 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1657 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1658 {
1659 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1660 break;
1661 }
1662 }
1663}
1664\f
1665/* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1666 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1667 is not in the hash table),
1668 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1669 If none can be found, return 0. */
1670
1671static rtx
1672use_related_value (x, elt)
1673 rtx x;
1674 struct table_elt *elt;
1675{
1676 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1677 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
1678 int offset;
1679
1680 /* First, is there anything related known?
1681 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1682 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1683
1684 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1685 relt = elt;
1686 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1687 {
1688 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1689 if (subexp != 0)
1690 relt = lookup (subexp,
1691 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1692 GET_MODE (subexp));
1693 }
1694
1695 if (relt == 0)
1696 return 0;
1697
1698 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1699 equivalent register. */
1700
1701 p = relt;
1702 while (1)
1703 {
1704 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1705 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1706 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1707 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1708 value.
1709
1710 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1711 the same value as X. */
1712
1713 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1714 q = 0;
1715 else
1716 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1717 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1718 break;
1719
1720 if (q)
1721 break;
1722
1723 p = p->related_value;
1724
1725 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1726 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1727 and it has no related values recorded. */
1728 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1729 break;
1730 }
1731
1732 if (q == 0)
1733 return 0;
1734
1735 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1736 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1737 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1738}
1739\f
1740/* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1741 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1742 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1743 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1744
1745 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1746
1747 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1748 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1749 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1750 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1751
1752 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1753 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1754
1755static int
1756canon_hash (x, mode)
1757 rtx x;
1758 enum machine_mode mode;
1759{
1760 register int i, j;
1761 register int hash = 0;
1762 register enum rtx_code code;
1763 register char *fmt;
1764
1765 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1766 repeat:
1767 if (x == 0)
1768 return hash;
1769
1770 code = GET_CODE (x);
1771 switch (code)
1772 {
1773 case REG:
1774 {
1775 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1776
1777 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1778 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1779 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1780 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1781
1782 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1783 && (global_regs[regno]
1784#ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1785 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1786 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1787 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1788 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1789#endif
1790 ))
1791 {
1792 do_not_record = 1;
1793 return 0;
1794 }
1795 return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
1796 }
1797
1798 case CONST_INT:
1799 hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
1800 + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
1801 return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
1802
1803 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1804 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1805 the integers representing the constant. */
1806 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1807 {
1808 int i;
1809 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1810 {
1811 int tem = XINT (x, i);
1812 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1813 }
1814 }
1815 return hash;
1816
1817 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1818 case LABEL_REF:
1819 /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number. */
1820 return (hash + ((int) LABEL_REF << 7)
1821 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1822
1823 case SYMBOL_REF:
1824 return (hash + ((int) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
1825 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1826
1827 case MEM:
1828 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1829 {
1830 do_not_record = 1;
1831 return 0;
1832 }
1833 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1834 {
1835 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1836 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1837 }
1838 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1839 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1840 hash += (int) MEM;
1841 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1842 goto repeat;
1843
1844 case PRE_DEC:
1845 case PRE_INC:
1846 case POST_DEC:
1847 case POST_INC:
1848 case PC:
1849 case CC0:
1850 case CALL:
1851 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1852 do_not_record = 1;
1853 return 0;
1854
1855 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1856 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1857 {
1858 do_not_record = 1;
1859 return 0;
1860 }
1861 }
1862
1863 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1864 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1865 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1866 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1867 {
1868 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1869 {
1870 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1871 rtx tem1;
1872
1873 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1874 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1875 that way. */
1876 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1877 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1878 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1879 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1880 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1881 tem = tem1;
1882
1883 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1884 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1885 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1886 if (i == 0)
1887 {
1888 x = tem;
1889 goto repeat;
1890 }
1891 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1892 }
1893 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1894 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1895 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1896 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1897 {
1898 register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
1899 if (p)
1900 while (*p)
1901 {
1902 register int tem = *p++;
1903 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1904 }
1905 }
1906 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1907 {
1908 register int tem = XINT (x, i);
1909 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1910 }
1911 else
1912 abort ();
1913 }
1914 return hash;
1915}
1916
1917/* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1918
1919static int
1920safe_hash (x, mode)
1921 rtx x;
1922 enum machine_mode mode;
1923{
1924 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
1925 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1926 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1927 int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
1928 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
1929 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
1930 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
1931 return hash;
1932}
1933\f
1934/* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
1935 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
1936 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
1937 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
1938 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
1939 in Y for being marked as valid.
1940
1941 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
1942 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
1943 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
1944 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
1945 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
1946 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
1947 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
1948
1949static int
1950exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
1951 rtx x, y;
1952 int validate;
1953 int equal_values;
1954{
1955 register int i;
1956 register enum rtx_code code;
1957 register char *fmt;
1958
1959 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
1960 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
1961 if (x == y && !validate)
1962 return 1;
1963 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
1964 return x == y;
1965
1966 code = GET_CODE (x);
1967 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
1968 {
1969 if (!equal_values)
1970 return 0;
1971
1972 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
1973 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
1974 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
1975 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
1976 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
1977 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
1978 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
1979 return 1;
1980
1981 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
1982 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
1983 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1984 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
1985 return 1;
1986
1987 return 0;
1988 }
1989
1990 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
1991 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
1992 return 0;
1993
1994 switch (code)
1995 {
1996 case PC:
1997 case CC0:
1998 return x == y;
1999
2000 case CONST_INT:
2001 return XINT (x, 0) == XINT (y, 0);
2002
2003 case LABEL_REF:
2004 case SYMBOL_REF:
2005 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2006
2007 case REG:
2008 {
2009 int regno = REGNO (y);
2010 int endregno
2011 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2012 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2013 int i;
2014
2015 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2016 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2017 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2018
2019 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2020 return 0;
2021
2022 if (! validate)
2023 return 1;
2024
2025 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2026 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2027 return 0;
2028
2029 return 1;
2030 }
2031
2032 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2033 case PLUS:
2034 case MULT:
2035 case AND:
2036 case IOR:
2037 case XOR:
2038 case NE:
2039 case EQ:
2040 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2041 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2042 validate, equal_values))
2043 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2044 validate, equal_values)
2045 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2046 validate, equal_values)));
2047 }
2048
2049 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2050 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2051
2052 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2053 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2054 {
2055 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2056 {
2057 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2058 return 0;
2059 }
2060 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2061 {
2062 int j;
2063 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2064 return 0;
2065 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2066 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2067 validate, equal_values))
2068 return 0;
2069 }
2070 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
2071 {
2072 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2073 return 0;
2074 }
2075 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
2076 {
2077 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2078 return 0;
2079 }
2080 else if (fmt[i] != '0')
2081 abort ();
2082 }
2083 return 1;
2084}
2085\f
2086/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2087 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2088 for being in the hash table. */
2089
2090int
2091refers_to_p (x, y)
2092 rtx x, y;
2093{
2094 register int i;
2095 register enum rtx_code code;
2096 register char *fmt;
2097
2098 repeat:
2099 if (x == y)
2100 return 1;
2101 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2102 return 0;
2103
2104 code = GET_CODE (x);
2105 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2106 If so, return 1. */
2107 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2108 {
2109 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2110 return 1;
2111 }
2112
2113 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2114
2115 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2116 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2117 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2118 {
2119 if (i == 0)
2120 {
2121 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2122 goto repeat;
2123 }
2124 else
2125 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2126 return 1;
2127 }
2128 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2129 {
2130 int j;
2131 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2132 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2133 return 1;
2134 }
2135
2136 return 0;
2137}
2138\f
2139/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2140 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2141 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2142 and END (exclusive).
2143
2144 The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
2145 This function is not used in such cases.
2146
2147 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2148 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2149 as if it were that constant value.
2150 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2151
2152int
2153refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2154 rtx x, base;
2155 int start, end;
2156{
2157 register int i;
2158 register enum rtx_code code;
2159 register char *fmt;
2160
2161 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2162 {
2163 start += INTVAL (base);
2164 end += INTVAL (base);
2165 base = const0_rtx;
2166 }
2167
2168 repeat:
2169 if (x == 0)
2170 return 0;
2171
2172 code = GET_CODE (x);
2173 if (code == MEM)
2174 {
2175 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2176 int myend;
2177
2178 i = 0;
2179 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2180 /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
2181 at such times, this info is not available. */
2182 && qty_const != 0
2183 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
2184 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
2185 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
2186 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
2187 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2188 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2189 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2190 && qty_const != 0
2191 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2192 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
2193 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2194 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2195 {
2196 i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2197 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
2198 }
2199
2200 check_addr:
2201 if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2202 addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2203
2204 /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
2205 the integer in I. */
2206 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2207 && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
2208 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2209 i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2210 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
2211 {
2212 if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
2213 return 1;
2214 /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
2215 const value in the XEXP part. */
2216 addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
2217 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2218 i = 0;
2219 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2220 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2221 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2222 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2223 {
2224 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2225 start += tem;
2226 end += tem;
2227 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2228 }
2229 goto check_addr;
2230 }
2231 else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2232 {
2233 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2234 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2235 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2236 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2237 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2238 {
2239 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2240 start += tem;
2241 end += tem;
2242 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2243 }
2244 goto check_addr;
2245 }
2246 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
2247 i = INTVAL (addr);
2248 else if (addr != base)
2249 return 0;
2250
2251 myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2252 return myend > start && i < end;
2253 }
2254
2255 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2256
2257 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2258 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2259 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2260 {
2261 if (i == 0)
2262 {
2263 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2264 goto repeat;
2265 }
2266 else
2267 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2268 return 1;
2269 }
2270 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2271 {
2272 int j;
2273 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2274 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2275 return 1;
2276 }
2277
2278 return 0;
2279}
2280
2281/* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2282 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2283 isn't considered variable. */
2284
2285static int
2286cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2287 rtx x;
2288{
2289 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2290 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2291 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2292
2293 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2294 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2295 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2296 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2297 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2298 return 0;
2299
2300 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2301 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2302 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2303 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2304 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2305 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2306 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2307 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2308 return 0;
2309
2310 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2311}
2312\f
2313/* Canonicalize an expression:
2314 replace each register reference inside it
2315 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2316
2317 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2318 or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
2319 substitution. */
2320
2321static rtx
2322canon_reg (x, insn)
2323 rtx x;
2324 rtx insn;
2325{
2326 register int i;
2327 register enum rtx_code code;
2328 register char *fmt;
2329
2330 if (x == 0)
2331 return x;
2332
2333 code = GET_CODE (x);
2334 switch (code)
2335 {
2336 case PC:
2337 case CC0:
2338 case CONST:
2339 case CONST_INT:
2340 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2341 case SYMBOL_REF:
2342 case LABEL_REF:
2343 case ADDR_VEC:
2344 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2345 return x;
2346
2347 case REG:
2348 {
2349 register int first;
2350
2351 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2352 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2353 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2354 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2355 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2356 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2357 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2358 return x;
2359
2360 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2361 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2362 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2363 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2364 }
2365 }
2366
2367 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2368 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2369 {
2370 register int j;
2371
2372 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2373 {
2374 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2375
2376 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
178c39f6 2377 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
7afe21cc 2378 if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
178c39f6
RK
2379 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2380 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2381 || (insn != 0 && insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)))
7afe21cc
RK
2382 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 0);
2383 else
2384 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2385 }
2386 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2387 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2388 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2389 }
2390
2391 return x;
2392}
2393\f
2394/* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2395 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2396 insn.
2397
2398 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2399 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2400 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2401 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2402 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2403 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2404 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2405 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2406 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2407 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2408 */
2409
2410void
2411find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2412 rtx insn;
2413 rtx *loc;
2414{
2415 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2416 rtx addr = *loc;
2417 int our_cost;
2418 int found_better = 1;
2419 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2420 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2421 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2422 int hash_code;
2423 int addr_volatile;
2424 int regno;
2425
2426 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2427 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2428 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2429 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2430
2431 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2432 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2433 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2434 addresses is costly. */
2435 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2436 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2437 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2438 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2439 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2440 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2441 && (regno = REGNO (addr),
2442 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2443 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2444 return;
2445
2446 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2447 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2448 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2449 be valid and produce better code. */
2450 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2451 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2452 addr = *loc;
2453
2454 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't do any better.
2455 Also, ignore if volatile. */
2456 do_not_record = 0;
2457 hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2458 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2459 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2460 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2461 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2462
2463 if (addr_volatile)
2464 return;
2465
2466 elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
2467
2468 if (elt == 0)
2469 return;
2470
2471#ifndef ADDRESS_COST
2472 our_cost = elt->cost;
2473
2474 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2475 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2476 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2477 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2478 && validate_change (insn, loc, canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0), 0))
2479 return;
2480
2481#else
2482
2483 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry in
2484 the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate choices
2485 that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better one that
2486 hasn't already been tried. */
2487
2488 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2489 p->flag = 0;
2490
2491 while (found_better)
2492 {
2493 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2494 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2495 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2496
2497 found_better = 0;
2498 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2499 if (! p->flag
2500 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2501 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2502 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2503 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2504 {
2505 found_better = 1;
2506 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2507 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2508 best_elt = p;
2509 }
2510
2511 if (found_better)
2512 {
2513 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2514 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp), 0), 0))
2515 return;
2516 else
2517 best_elt->flag = 1;
2518 }
2519 }
2520#endif
2521}
2522\f
2523/* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2524 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2525 what values are being compared.
2526
2527 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2528 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2529 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2530 compared to produce cc0.
2531
2532 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2533 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2534
2535static enum rtx_code
2536find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
2537 enum rtx_code code;
2538 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2539{
2540 rtx arg1, arg2;
2541
2542 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2543
2544 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2545
2546 while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
2547 {
2548 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2549 rtx x = 0;
2550 int reverse_code = 0;
2551 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2552
2553 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2554 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2555 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2556 when given CC0. */
2557
2558 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2559 x = arg1;
2560
2561 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2562 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2563
2564 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2565 {
c610adec
RK
2566 if (code == NE
2567 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2568 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2569#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2570 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2571 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2572#endif
2573 )
7afe21cc 2574 x = arg1;
c610adec
RK
2575 else if (code == EQ
2576 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2577 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2578#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2579 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2580 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2581#endif
2582 )
7afe21cc
RK
2583 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2584 }
2585
2586 /* ??? We could also check for
2587
2588 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2589
2590 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2591
2592 if (x == 0)
2593 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2594 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2595 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2596 GET_MODE (arg1));
2597 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2598
2599 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2600 {
2601 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2602
2603 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2604 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2605 continue;
2606
2607 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2608 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2609 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2610 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2611 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2612 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2613 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2614 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2615 || ((code == NE
2616 || (code == LT
c610adec 2617 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
2618 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2619 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c610adec
RK
2620 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2621#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2622 || (code == LT
2623 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2624 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2625#endif
2626 )
7afe21cc
RK
2627 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2628 {
2629 x = p->exp;
2630 break;
2631 }
2632 else if ((code == EQ
2633 || (code == GE
c610adec 2634 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
2635 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2636 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c610adec
RK
2637 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2638#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2639 || (code == GE
2640 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2641 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2642#endif
2643 )
7afe21cc
RK
2644 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2645 {
2646 reverse_code = 1;
2647 x = p->exp;
2648 break;
2649 }
2650
2651 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2652 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2653 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2654 {
2655 arg1 = p->exp;
2656 continue;
2657 }
2658 }
2659
2660 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2661 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2662 if (x == 0)
2663 break;
2664
2665 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2666 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2667 code = GET_CODE (x);
2668
2669 if (reverse_code)
2670 code = reverse_condition (code);
2671 }
2672
2673 /* Return our results. */
2674 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2675
2676 return code;
2677}
2678\f
2679/* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2680 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2681 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2682
2683rtx
2684simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2685 enum rtx_code code;
2686 enum machine_mode mode;
2687 rtx op;
2688 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2689{
2690 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2691
2692 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2693 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2694 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2695
2696#if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2697 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2698 {
2699 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2700
2701#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2702 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2703#else
2704 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2705#endif
2706 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2707 }
2708 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2709 {
2710 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2711
2712#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2713 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2714#else
2715 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2716#endif
2717 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2718 }
2719
2720 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2721 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2722 {
2723 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2724
2725#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2726 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2727#else
2728 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2729 {
2730 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2731 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2732 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2733 d += (double) (unsigned) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
2734 d = (- d - 1.0);
2735 }
2736 else
2737 {
2738 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2739 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2740 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2741 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2742 }
2743#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2744 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2745 }
2746 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2747 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2748 {
2749 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2750
2751#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2752 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2753 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2754#else
2755 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2756 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2757 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2758 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2759#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2760 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2761 }
2762#endif
2763
2764 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2765 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
2766 {
2767 register int arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2768 register int val;
2769
2770 switch (code)
2771 {
2772 case NOT:
2773 val = ~ arg0;
2774 break;
2775
2776 case NEG:
2777 val = - arg0;
2778 break;
2779
2780 case ABS:
2781 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2782 break;
2783
2784 case FFS:
2785 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2786 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2787 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2788 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2789 break;
2790
2791 case TRUNCATE:
2792 val = arg0;
2793 break;
2794
2795 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2796 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2797 op_mode = mode;
2798 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2799 val = arg0;
2800 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2801 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2802 else
2803 return 0;
2804 break;
2805
2806 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2807 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2808 op_mode = mode;
2809 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2810 val = arg0;
2811 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2812 {
2813 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2814 if (val & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
2815 val -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
2816 }
2817 else
2818 return 0;
2819 break;
2820
d45cf215
RS
2821 case SQRT:
2822 return 0;
2823
7afe21cc
RK
2824 default:
2825 abort ();
2826 }
2827
2828 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2829 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2830 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2831 unsigned value for this mode. */
2832 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2833 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
2834 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2835
2836 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
2837 }
2838
2839 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
2840 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
2841 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2842 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2843 {
2844 int l1, h1, lv, hv;
2845
2846 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
2847 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2848 else
2849 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2850
2851 switch (code)
2852 {
2853 case NOT:
2854 lv = ~ l1;
2855 hv = ~ h1;
2856 break;
2857
2858 case NEG:
2859 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2860 break;
2861
2862 case ABS:
2863 if (h1 < 0)
2864 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2865 else
2866 lv = l1, hv = h1;
2867 break;
2868
2869 case FFS:
2870 hv = 0;
2871 if (l1 == 0)
2872 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
2873 else
2874 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
2875 break;
2876
2877 case TRUNCATE:
2878 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2879 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
2880 else
2881 return 0;
2882 break;
2883
d45cf215
RS
2884 case SQRT:
2885 return 0;
2886
7afe21cc
RK
2887 default:
2888 return 0;
2889 }
2890
2891 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
2892 }
2893
2894#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2895 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2896 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
2897 {
2898 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2899 jmp_buf handler;
2900 rtx x;
2901
2902 if (setjmp (handler))
2903 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
2904 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
2905 to do it should not get a warning. */
2906 return 0;
2907
2908 set_float_handler (handler);
2909
2910 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
2911
2912 switch (code)
2913 {
2914 case NEG:
2915 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
2916 break;
2917
2918 case ABS:
8b3686ed 2919 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
7afe21cc
RK
2920 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
2921 break;
2922
2923 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
2924 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, d);
2925 break;
2926
2927 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
2928 /* All this does is change the mode. */
2929 break;
2930
2931 case FIX:
2932 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
2933 break;
2934
2935 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2936 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
2937 break;
2938
d45cf215
RS
2939 case SQRT:
2940 return 0;
2941
7afe21cc
RK
2942 default:
2943 abort ();
2944 }
2945
2946 x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
2947 set_float_handler (0);
2948 return x;
2949 }
2950 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
2951 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
2952 {
2953 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2954 jmp_buf handler;
2955 rtx x;
2956 int val;
2957
2958 if (setjmp (handler))
2959 return 0;
2960
2961 set_float_handler (handler);
2962
2963 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
2964
2965 switch (code)
2966 {
2967 case FIX:
2968 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
2969 break;
2970
2971 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2972 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
2973 break;
2974
2975 default:
2976 abort ();
2977 }
2978
2979 set_float_handler (0);
2980
2981 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2982 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2983 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2984 unsigned value for this mode. */
2985 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2986 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
2987 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2988
2989 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
2990 }
2991#endif
a6acbe15
RS
2992 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
2993 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
2994 else
7afe21cc
RK
2995 {
2996 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
a6acbe15 2997 aren't constant. */
7afe21cc
RK
2998 switch (code)
2999 {
3000 case NEG:
3001 case NOT:
3002 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3003 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3004 return XEXP (op, 0);
3005 break;
3006
3007 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3008 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3009 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3010 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3011 the Vax). */
3012 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3013 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3014 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3015 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3016 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3017 return XEXP (op, 0);
3018 break;
3019 }
3020
3021 return 0;
3022 }
7afe21cc
RK
3023}
3024\f
3025/* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3026 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3027
3028 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3029 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3030
3031rtx
3032simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3033 enum rtx_code code;
3034 enum machine_mode mode;
3035 rtx op0, op1;
3036{
3037 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3038 int val;
3039 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3040
3041 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3042 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3043 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3044 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3045
3046 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3047 abort ();
3048
3049#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3050 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3051 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3052 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3053 {
3054 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3055 jmp_buf handler;
3056
3057 if (setjmp (handler))
3058 return 0;
3059
3060 set_float_handler (handler);
3061
3062 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3063 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
3064 f0 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f0);
3065 f1 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f1);
3066
3067#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3068 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
3069#else
3070 switch (code)
3071 {
3072 case PLUS:
3073 value = f0 + f1;
3074 break;
3075 case MINUS:
3076 value = f0 - f1;
3077 break;
3078 case MULT:
3079 value = f0 * f1;
3080 break;
3081 case DIV:
3082#ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3083 if (f1 == 0)
3084 abort ();
3085#endif
3086 value = f0 / f1;
3087 break;
3088 case SMIN:
3089 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3090 break;
3091 case SMAX:
3092 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3093 break;
3094 default:
3095 abort ();
3096 }
3097#endif
3098
3099 set_float_handler (0);
3100 value = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, value);
3101 return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
3102 }
3103
3104 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3105 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3106 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3107 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3108 {
3109 int l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
3110
3111 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3112
3113 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3114 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3115 else
3116 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3117
3118 switch (code)
3119 {
3120 case MINUS:
3121 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3122 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3123 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3124
3125 /* .. fall through ... */
3126
3127 case PLUS:
3128 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3129 break;
3130
3131 case MULT:
3132 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3133 break;
3134
3135 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3136 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3137 it. */
3138 return 0;
3139
3140 case AND:
3141 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3142 break;
3143
3144 case IOR:
3145 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3146 break;
3147
3148 case XOR:
3149 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3150 break;
3151
3152 case SMIN:
3153 if (h1 < h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3154 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3155 else
3156 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3157 break;
3158
3159 case SMAX:
3160 if (h1 > h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3161 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3162 else
3163 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3164 break;
3165
3166 case UMIN:
3167 if ((unsigned) h1 < (unsigned) h2
3168 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3169 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3170 else
3171 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3172 break;
3173
3174 case UMAX:
3175 if ((unsigned) h1 > (unsigned) h2
3176 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3177 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3178 else
3179 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3180 break;
3181
3182 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3183 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFT:
3184 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3185#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3186 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3187#endif
3188
3189 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3190 return 0;
3191
3192 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3193 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3194 code == ASHIFTRT);
3195 else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
3196 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3197 code == ASHIFT);
3198 else if (code == ROTATE)
3199 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3200 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3201 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3202 break;
3203
3204 default:
3205 return 0;
3206 }
3207
3208 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3209 }
3210#endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3211
3212 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3213 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3214 {
3215 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3216 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3217
3218 switch (code)
3219 {
3220 case PLUS:
3221 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3222 for the other optimizations below. */
3223 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3224 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3225 break;
3226
3227 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3228 return op0;
3229
3230 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3231 the cases below. */
3232 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3233 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3234 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3235 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3236
3237 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3238 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3239 {
3240 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3241 op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3242 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3243 }
3244 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3245 {
3246 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3247 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3248 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3249 }
3250
3251 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3252 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3253 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3254 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3255 break;
3256
3257 /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
3258 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3259 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3260 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3261
3262 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3263 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3264 return XEXP (op1, 0);
3265
3266 /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a. */
3267 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3268 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3269 {
3270 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
3271 XEXP (op0, 0));
3272
3273 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
3274 }
3275
3276 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. */
3277 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
3278 && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
3279 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
3280 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3281 {
3282 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3283 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3284 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3285 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
3286 else
3287 return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
3288 gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
3289 GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
3290 ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
3291 GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
3292 ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
3293 }
3294 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3295 && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3296 && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
3297 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
3298 /* constant + (variable + constant)
3299 can result if an index register is made constant.
3300 We simplify this by adding the constants.
3301 If we did not, it would become an invalid address. */
3302 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3303 break;
3304
3305 case COMPARE:
3306#ifdef HAVE_cc0
3307 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3308 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3309 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3310
3311 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3312
3313 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3314 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3315 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3316 return op0;
3317#else
3318 /* Do nothing here. */
3319#endif
3320 break;
3321
3322 case MINUS:
21648b45
RK
3323 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3324 floating point. */
3325 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3326 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3327 break;
3328
3329 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point. */
7afe21cc
RK
3330 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3331 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
7afe21cc
RK
3332 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
3333 return const0_rtx;
3334
3335 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3336 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3337 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3338
7afe21cc
RK
3339 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3340 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3341 return op0;
3342
3343 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3344 the cases below. */
3345 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3346 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3347 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3348 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3349
3350 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3351 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3352 {
3353 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
3354 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3355 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3356 }
3357
3358 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3359 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3360 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3361 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3362 break;
3363
3364 /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b)) -> -a */
3365 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3366 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
3367 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3368 return XEXP (op0, 1);
3369 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3370 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
3371 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3372 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3373
3374 if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3375 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
3376 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3377 {
3378 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
3379 mode);
3380
3381 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
3382 }
3383 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3384 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
3385 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3386 {
3387 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
3388 mode);
3389
3390 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
3391 }
3392
3393 /* a - (a - b) -> b */
3394 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
3395 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3396 return XEXP (op1, 1);
3397
3398 /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified. Do variants of
3399 this involving commutativity. The most common case is
3400 (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases. */
3401 if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
3402 && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
3403 {
3404 rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
3405 rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
3406 int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
3407 int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
3408 rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
3409
3410 /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms. */
3411 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3412 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
3413 else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
3414 && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3415 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
3416 else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
3417 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3418 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
3419 else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
3420 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3421 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
3422
3423 /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
3424 status should be complemented. */
3425 rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
3426
3427 /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
3428 of the remaining two terms. */
3429 if (lhs)
3430 {
3431 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3432 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3433 mode,
3434 lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3435 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3436 if (tem == 0)
3437 tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3438 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3439 mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3440 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3441
3442 /* If both sides negated, negate result. */
3443 if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
3444 {
3445 rtx tem1
3446 = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
3447 if (tem1 == 0)
3448 tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
3449 tem = tem1;
3450 }
3451
3452 return tem;
3453 }
3454
3455 return 0;
3456 }
3457
3458 /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a. */
3459 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3460 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3461 {
3462 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3463 XEXP (op1, 1));
3464
3465 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
3466 }
3467
3468 /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a. */
3469 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3470 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3471 {
3472 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3473 XEXP (op1, 0));
3474
3475 return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
3476 ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
3477 : 0);
3478 }
3479
3480 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3481 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3482 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3483 break;
3484
3485 case MULT:
3486 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3487 {
3488 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3489
3490 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3491 }
3492
3493 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3494 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3495 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3496 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3497 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3498 return op1;
3499
3500 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3501 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3502 so we can do this anyway. */
3503 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3504 return op0;
3505
3506 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift. */
3507 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3508 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
3509 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0,
3510 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val));
3511
3512 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3513 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3514 {
3515 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3516 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3517
3518 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3519 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
3520 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3521 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3522
3523 else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
3524 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3525 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3526 }
3527 break;
3528
3529 case IOR:
3530 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3531 return op0;
3532 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3533 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3534 return op1;
3535 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3536 return op0;
3537 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3538 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3539 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3540 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3541 return constm1_rtx;
3542 break;
3543
3544 case XOR:
3545 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3546 return op0;
3547 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3548 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3549 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3550 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3551 return const0_rtx;
3552 break;
3553
3554 case AND:
3555 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3556 return const0_rtx;
3557 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3558 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3559 return op0;
3560 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3561 return op0;
3562 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3563 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3564 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3565 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3566 return const0_rtx;
3567 break;
3568
3569 case UDIV:
3570 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3571 below). */
3572 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3573 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
3574 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0,
3575 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, arg1));
3576
3577 /* ... fall through ... */
3578
3579 case DIV:
3580 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3581 return op0;
3582 else if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3583 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3584 return op0;
3585#if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do. */
3586#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3587 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. */
3588 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3589 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3590 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
3591 {
3592 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3593 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3594 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3595 abort();
3596#if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3597 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
3598 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3599 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3600#else
3601 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3602 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3603 }
3604#endif
3605#endif
3606#endif
3607 break;
3608
3609 case UMOD:
3610 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3611 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3612 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
3613 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0,
3614 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (op1) - 1));
3615
3616 /* ... fall through ... */
3617
3618 case MOD:
3619 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3620 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3621 return const0_rtx;
3622 break;
3623
3624 case ROTATERT:
3625 case ROTATE:
3626 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
3627 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3628 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3629 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3630 return op0;
3631
3632 /* ... fall through ... */
3633
3634 case LSHIFT:
3635 case ASHIFT:
3636 case ASHIFTRT:
3637 case LSHIFTRT:
3638 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3639 return op0;
3640 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3641 return op0;
3642 break;
3643
3644 case SMIN:
3645 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3646 && INTVAL (op1) == 1 << (width -1)
3647 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3648 return op1;
3649 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3650 return op0;
3651 break;
3652
3653 case SMAX:
3654 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3655 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
3656 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3657 return op1;
3658 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3659 return op0;
3660 break;
3661
3662 case UMIN:
3663 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3664 return op1;
3665 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3666 return op0;
3667 break;
3668
3669 case UMAX:
3670 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3671 return op1;
3672 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3673 return op0;
3674 break;
3675
3676 default:
3677 abort ();
3678 }
3679
3680 return 0;
3681 }
3682
3683 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3684 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3685
3686 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3687 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3688
3689 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
3690 {
3691 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3692 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3693
3694 arg0s = arg0;
3695 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3696 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
3697
3698 arg1s = arg1;
3699 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3700 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
3701 }
3702 else
3703 {
3704 arg0s = arg0;
3705 arg1s = arg1;
3706 }
3707
3708 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3709
3710 switch (code)
3711 {
3712 case PLUS:
538b78e7 3713 val = arg0s + arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3714 break;
3715
3716 case MINUS:
538b78e7 3717 val = arg0s - arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3718 break;
3719
3720 case MULT:
3721 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3722 break;
3723
3724 case DIV:
3725 if (arg1s == 0)
3726 return 0;
3727 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3728 break;
3729
3730 case MOD:
3731 if (arg1s == 0)
3732 return 0;
3733 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3734 break;
3735
3736 case UDIV:
3737 if (arg1 == 0)
3738 return 0;
3739 val = (unsigned) arg0 / arg1;
3740 break;
3741
3742 case UMOD:
3743 if (arg1 == 0)
3744 return 0;
3745 val = (unsigned) arg0 % arg1;
3746 break;
3747
3748 case AND:
3749 val = arg0 & arg1;
3750 break;
3751
3752 case IOR:
3753 val = arg0 | arg1;
3754 break;
3755
3756 case XOR:
3757 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3758 break;
3759
3760 case LSHIFTRT:
3761 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3762 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3763 if (arg1 < 0)
3764 return 0;
3765
3766#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3767 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3768#endif
3769
3770 if (arg1 >= width)
3771 return 0;
3772
3773 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1;
3774 break;
3775
3776 case ASHIFT:
3777 case LSHIFT:
3778 if (arg1 < 0)
3779 return 0;
3780
3781#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3782 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3783#endif
3784
3785 if (arg1 >= width)
3786 return 0;
3787
3788 val = ((unsigned) arg0) << arg1;
3789 break;
3790
3791 case ASHIFTRT:
3792 if (arg1 < 0)
3793 return 0;
3794
3795#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3796 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3797#endif
3798
3799 if (arg1 >= width)
3800 return 0;
3801
3802 val = arg0s >> arg1;
3803 break;
3804
3805 case ROTATERT:
3806 if (arg1 < 0)
3807 return 0;
3808
3809 arg1 %= width;
3810 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << (width - arg1))
3811 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1));
3812 break;
3813
3814 case ROTATE:
3815 if (arg1 < 0)
3816 return 0;
3817
3818 arg1 %= width;
3819 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << arg1)
3820 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
3821 break;
3822
3823 case COMPARE:
3824 /* Do nothing here. */
3825 return 0;
3826
830a38ee
RS
3827 case SMIN:
3828 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3829 break;
3830
3831 case UMIN:
3832 val = (unsigned int)arg0 <= (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3833 break;
3834
3835 case SMAX:
3836 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3837 break;
3838
3839 case UMAX:
3840 val = (unsigned int)arg0 > (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3841 break;
3842
7afe21cc
RK
3843 default:
3844 abort ();
3845 }
3846
3847 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
3848 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
3849 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
3850 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3851 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
3852 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3853
3854 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
3855}
3856\f
3857/* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
3858 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. */
3859
3860rtx
3861simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3862 enum rtx_code code;
3863 enum machine_mode mode;
3864 rtx op0, op1;
3865{
3866 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3867 int val;
3868 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3869
3870 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
3871 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
3872 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3873
3874 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3875 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3876 {
3877 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3878 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3879
3880 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
3881 the result. */
3882 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3883 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3884 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
3885 return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
3886 || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3887 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3888 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3889 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3890 {
3891 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
3892 int value;
3893 jmp_buf handler;
3894 int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
3895
3896 if (setjmp (handler))
3897 return 0;
3898
3899 set_float_handler (handler);
3900 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
3901 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
3902 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
3903 op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
3904 op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
3905 set_float_handler (0);
3906
3907 switch (code)
3908 {
3909 case EQ:
3910 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3911 case NE:
3912 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3913 case LE:
3914 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3915 case LT:
3916 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3917 case GE:
3918 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3919 case GT:
3920 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3921 }
3922 }
3923
3924 switch (code)
3925 {
3926 case EQ:
3927 {
3928#if 0
3929 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
3930 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
3931 return const0_rtx;
3932#endif
8b3686ed
RK
3933 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
3934 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
3935 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
3936 return const0_rtx;
3937 break;
3938 }
3939
3940 case NE:
3941#if 0
3942 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
3943 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
3944 return const_true_rtx;
3945#endif
8b3686ed
RK
3946 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
3947 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
3948 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
3949 return const_true_rtx;
3950 break;
3951
3952 case GEU:
3953 /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
3954 actually comparing a value, not a CC operand. */
3955 if (op1 == const0_rtx
3956 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3957 return const_true_rtx;
3958 break;
3959
3960 case LTU:
3961 if (op1 == const0_rtx
3962 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3963 return const0_rtx;
3964 break;
3965
3966 case LEU:
3967 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
3968 unsigned value. */
3969 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3970 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3971 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3972 return const_true_rtx;
3973 break;
3974
3975 case GTU:
3976 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3977 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3978 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3979 return const0_rtx;
3980 break;
3981 }
3982
3983 return 0;
3984 }
3985
3986 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3987 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3988
3989 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3990 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3991
3992 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
3993 {
3994 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3995 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3996
3997 arg0s = arg0;
3998 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3999 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
4000
4001 arg1s = arg1;
4002 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
4003 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
4004 }
4005 else
4006 {
4007 arg0s = arg0;
4008 arg1s = arg1;
4009 }
4010
4011 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
4012
4013 switch (code)
4014 {
4015 case NE:
4016 val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4017 break;
4018
4019 case EQ:
4020 val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4021 break;
4022
4023 case LE:
4024 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4025 break;
4026
4027 case LT:
4028 val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4029 break;
4030
4031 case GE:
4032 val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4033 break;
4034
4035 case GT:
4036 val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4037 break;
4038
4039 case LEU:
4040 val = ((unsigned) arg0) <= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4041 break;
4042
4043 case LTU:
4044 val = ((unsigned) arg0) < ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4045 break;
4046
4047 case GEU:
4048 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4049 break;
4050
4051 case GTU:
4052 val = ((unsigned) arg0) > ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4053 break;
4054
4055 default:
4056 abort ();
4057 }
4058
4059 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4060 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4061 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
4062 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4063 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4064 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4065
4066 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4067}
4068\f
4069/* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4070 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4071 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4072
4073rtx
4074simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4075 enum rtx_code code;
4076 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4077 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4078{
4079 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4080
4081 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4082 if (width == 0)
4083 width = HOST_BITS_PER_INT;
4084
4085 switch (code)
4086 {
4087 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4088 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4089 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4090 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4091 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4092 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
4093 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
4094 {
4095 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
4096 int val = INTVAL (op0);
4097
4098#if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4099 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4100#else
4101 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4102#endif
4103 if (HOST_BITS_PER_INT != INTVAL (op1))
4104 {
4105 /* First zero-extend. */
4106 val &= (1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
4107 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
4108 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT && (val & (1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
fc3ffe83 4109 val |= ~ ((1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
7afe21cc
RK
4110 }
4111
4112 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4113 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4114 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4115 unsigned value for this mode. */
4116 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4117 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4118 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4119
4120 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4121 }
4122 break;
4123
4124 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4125 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4126 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4127 break;
4128
4129 default:
4130 abort ();
4131 }
4132
4133 return 0;
4134}
4135\f
4136/* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4137 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4138 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4139 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4140 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4141
4142 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4143 return those contents. This is because an instruction that
4144 uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
4145
4146 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4147 of X before modifying it. */
4148
4149static rtx
4150fold_rtx (x, insn)
4151 rtx x;
4152 rtx insn;
4153{
4154 register enum rtx_code code;
4155 register enum machine_mode mode;
4156 register char *fmt;
4157 register int i, val;
4158 rtx new = 0;
4159 int copied = 0;
4160 int must_swap = 0;
4161
4162 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4163 rtx folded_arg0;
4164 rtx folded_arg1;
4165
4166 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4167 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4168 rtx const_arg0;
4169 rtx const_arg1;
4170 rtx const_arg2;
4171
4172 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4173 extends. */
4174 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4175
4176 if (x == 0)
4177 return x;
4178
4179 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4180 code = GET_CODE (x);
4181 switch (code)
4182 {
4183 case CONST:
4184 case CONST_INT:
4185 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4186 case SYMBOL_REF:
4187 case LABEL_REF:
4188 case REG:
4189 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4190 since they are used only for lists of args
4191 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4192 case EXPR_LIST:
4193 return x;
4194
4195#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4196 case CC0:
4197 return prev_insn_cc0;
4198#endif
4199
4200 case PC:
4201 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4202 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4203 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4204 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4205 {
4206 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4207
4208 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4209 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4210 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4211 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4212 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4213 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4214 }
4215 break;
4216
4217 case SUBREG:
c610adec
RK
4218 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4219 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4220 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
7afe21cc
RK
4221 return new;
4222
e5f6a288
RK
4223 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we can't do anything with
4224 it because we have no idea what value the extra bits would have. */
4225 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4226 return x;
4227
7afe21cc
RK
4228 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4229 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4230 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4231
4232 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4233 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4234 if (const_arg0)
4235 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4236
4237 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4238 {
4239 new = 0;
4240
4241 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4242 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4243 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4244 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4245 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4246 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4247 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4248 if (new)
4249 return new;
4250 }
e5f6a288
RK
4251
4252 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
4253 we can find an equivalence for REG that is a arithmetic operation
4254 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4255 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4256 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4257 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4258 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4259 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4260 word-sized arithmetic. */
4261
4262 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4263 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)))
4264 {
4265 struct table_elt *elt;
4266
4267 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4268 called. */
4269 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4270 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4271 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4272
4273 if (elt)
4274 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4275
4276 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4277 {
4278 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4279 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4280 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4281 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4282 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4283 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4284 {
4285 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4286
4287 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4288 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4289
4290 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4291 if (op0)
4292 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4293 op0, mode);
4294 }
4295 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4296 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4297 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4298 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4299 == mode))
4300 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4301 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4302 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4303 == mode))
4304 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4305 {
4306 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4307 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4308
4309 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4310 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4311
4312 if (op0)
4313 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4314
4315 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4316 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, 0);
4317
4318 if (op1)
4319 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4320
4321 if (op0 && op1)
4322 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4323 op0, op1);
4324 }
4325
4326 if (new)
4327 return new;
4328 }
4329 }
4330
7afe21cc
RK
4331 return x;
4332
4333 case NOT:
4334 case NEG:
4335 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4336 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4337 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4338 if (new)
4339 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4340 break;
4341
4342 case MEM:
4343 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4344 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4345 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4346 if (insn != 0)
4347 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4348
4349 {
4350 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4351 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
4352 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4353 rtx base = 0;
4354 int offset = 0;
4355
4356 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4357 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4358 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4359 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4360 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4361
4362 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4363 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4364 base = addr;
4365 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4366 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4367 {
4368 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4369 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4370 }
4371 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4372 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4373 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4374
4375 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4376 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4377 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4378 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4379 {
4380 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4381 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4382 rtx new;
4383
4384 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4385 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4386
4387 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4388 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4389 return constant;
4390
4391 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4392 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4393 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4394 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4395 worry about. */
4396 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4397 return x;
4398
4399 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4400 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4401 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4402 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4403 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4404 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4405 return new;
4406
4407 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4408 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4409 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4410 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4411 return new;
4412 }
4413
4414 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4415 table, we also know its value. */
4416 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4417 {
4418 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4419 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4420
4421 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4422 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4423 {
4424 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4425
4426 if (offset >= 0
4427 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4428 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4429 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4430 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4431 }
4432 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4433 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4434 {
4435 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4436
4437 if (offset >= 0
4438 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4439 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4440 {
4441 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4442 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4443 XEXP (table, 0));
4444
4445 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4446 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4447
4448 return new;
4449 }
4450 }
4451 }
4452
4453 return x;
4454 }
4455 }
4456
4457 const_arg0 = 0;
4458 const_arg1 = 0;
4459 const_arg2 = 0;
4460 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4461
4462 /* Try folding our operands.
4463 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4464
4465 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4466 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4467 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4468 {
4469 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4470 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4471 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4472 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4473 rtx replacements[2];
4474 int j;
4475
4476 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4477 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4478 {
4479 case REG:
4480 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4481 here for speed. */
4482 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
4483 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
4484 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
4485 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
4486 const_arg
4487 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
4488 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
4489 break;
4490
4491 case CONST:
4492 case CONST_INT:
4493 case SYMBOL_REF:
4494 case LABEL_REF:
4495 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4496 const_arg = arg;
4497 break;
4498
4499#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4500 case CC0:
4501 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
4502 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
4503 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4504 break;
4505#endif
4506
4507 default:
4508 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
4509 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4510 }
4511
4512 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
4513 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
4514 switch (i)
4515 {
4516 case 0:
4517 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
4518 const_arg0 = const_arg;
4519 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
4520 break;
4521 case 1:
4522 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
4523 const_arg1 = const_arg;
4524 break;
4525 case 2:
4526 const_arg2 = const_arg;
4527 break;
4528 }
4529
4530 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
4531 equivalent constant argument. */
4532 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
4533 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
4534 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
4535 else
4536 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
4537
4538 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
4539 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
4540 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
4541 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
4542 than what is already there. */
4543
4544 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
4545 continue;
4546
4547 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4548 {
4549 x = copy_rtx (x);
4550 copied = 1;
4551 }
4552
4553 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
4554 for (j = 0;
4555 j < 2 && replacements[j]
4556 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
4557 j++)
4558 {
4559 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
4560 break;
4561
4562 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4563 {
4564 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
4565 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
4566
4567 if (apply_change_group ())
4568 {
4569 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
4570 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
4571 rtx tem;
4572
4573 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
4574 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
4575 must_swap = 1;
4576 break;
4577 }
4578 }
4579 }
4580 }
4581
4582 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
4583 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
4584 Doing nothing is harmless. */
4585 ;
4586
4587 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
4588 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
4589 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
4590
4591 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4592 {
4593 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
4594 && (const_arg1 == 0
4595 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
4596 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
4597 {
4598 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
4599
4600 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4601 {
4602 x = copy_rtx (x);
4603 copied = 1;
4604 }
4605
4606 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
4607 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
4608 if (apply_change_group ())
4609 {
4610 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
4611 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
4612 }
4613 }
4614 }
4615
4616 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
4617
4618 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
4619 {
4620 case '1':
e4890d45
RS
4621 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
4622 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
4623 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
4624 break;
7afe21cc
RK
4625 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
4626 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4627 mode_arg0);
4628 break;
4629
4630 case '<':
4631 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
4632 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
4633 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
4634 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
4635
4636 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4637 {
4638 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
c610adec
RK
4639 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4640
4641#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4642 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4643 {
4644 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4645 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4646 }
4647#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4648
4649 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
4650 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4651 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
4652
4653 /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
4654 old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants. If the resulting
4655 mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
4656 of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
4657 comparison. */
4658
4659 if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
4660 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
4661 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
4662
4663 else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
4664 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
4665 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
4666
4667 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
4668 break;
4669
4670 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
4671 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
4672 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4673 {
4674 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
4675 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
4676 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
4677 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
4678#if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
4679 come out as 0. */
4680 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
4681#endif
4682 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
4683 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
4684 {
4685 if (code == EQ)
c610adec 4686 return false;
7afe21cc 4687 else if (code == NE)
c610adec 4688 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4689 }
4690
4691 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
4692 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
4693 since x might be a NaN. */
4694
4695 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4696 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
4697 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
4698 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4699 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4700 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
4701 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
4702 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
4703 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
4704 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4705 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
4706 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
4707 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4708 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
4709 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
4710 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
c610adec 4711 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4712
4713 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
4714 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
4715 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
4716 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
4717 {
4718 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
4719
4720 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
4721 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
4722 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4723 reverse_condition (code))
4724 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
4725 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
4726 || (const_arg1
4727 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
4728 const_arg1))
4729 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4730 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
4731 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
4732 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4733 code)
c610adec 4734 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4735 }
4736 }
4737 }
4738
4739 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
4740 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
4741 determine the result of this comparison. */
4742
4743 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
4744 {
4745 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
4746 rtx inner_const;
4747
4748 if (y != 0
4749 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
4750 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
4751 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
4752 {
4753 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
4754 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_INT >= sign_bitnum
4755 && (INTVAL (inner_const) & (1 << sign_bitnum)));
c610adec
RK
4756 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4757
4758#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4759 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4760 {
4761 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4762 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4763 }
4764#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4765
4766 switch (code)
4767 {
4768 case EQ:
c610adec 4769 return false;
7afe21cc 4770 case NE:
c610adec 4771 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4772 case LT: case LE:
4773 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4774 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4775 break;
4776 case GT: case GE:
4777 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4778 return false;
7afe21cc
RK
4779 break;
4780 }
4781 }
4782 }
4783
4784 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
4785 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4786 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
c610adec
RK
4787#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4788 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
4789 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
4790 : immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
4791#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4792 break;
4793
4794 case '2':
4795 case 'c':
4796 switch (code)
4797 {
4798 case PLUS:
4799 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
4800 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
4801 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
4802 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
4803 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
4804 {
4805 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
4806
4807 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
4808 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
4809 return XEXP (y, 0);
4810 }
4811
4812 /* ... fall through ... */
4813
4814 case MINUS:
4815 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
4816 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
4817 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
4818 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
4819 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
4820 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
4821 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
4822 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
4823 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
4824 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
4825
4826 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4827 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
4828 {
4829 int is_shift
4830 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
4831 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
4832 rtx inner_const;
4833 enum rtx_code associate_code;
4834 rtx new_const;
4835
4836 if (y == 0
4837 || 0 == (inner_const
4838 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
4839 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
4840 /* If we have compiled a statement like
4841 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
4842 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
4843 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
4844 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
4845 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
4846 break;
4847
4848 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
4849 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
4850 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
4851 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
4852
4853 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
4854 && (0
4855#if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
4856 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4857#endif
4858#if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
4859 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4860#endif
4861 ))
4862 break;
4863
4864 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
4865 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
4866
4867 associate_code
4868 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
4869 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
4870
4871 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
4872 const_arg1, inner_const);
4873
4874 if (new_const == 0)
4875 break;
4876
4877 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
4878 produce a shift of larger than the object. This could
4879 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
4880 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts. */
4881
4882 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
4883 && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4884 break;
4885
4886 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
4887
4888 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
4889 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
4890 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
4891
4892 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
4893 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
4894
4895 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
4896 if (new)
4897 return new;
4898
4899 return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
4900 }
4901 }
4902
4903 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
4904 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4905 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
4906 break;
4907
4908 case 'o':
4909 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
4910 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
4911 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
4912 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
4913 return const_arg1;
4914 break;
4915
4916 case '3':
4917 case 'b':
4918 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
4919 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4920 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
4921 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
4922 break;
4923 }
4924
4925 return new ? new : x;
4926}
4927\f
4928/* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
4929 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
4930
4931static rtx
4932equiv_constant (x)
4933 rtx x;
4934{
4935 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
4936 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
4937 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
4938 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
4939
4940 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
4941 return x;
4942
fc3ffe83
RK
4943 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
4944 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
4945 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
4946 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
4947
4948 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
4949 {
4950 struct table_elt *elt;
4951
4952 x = fold_rtx (x, 0);
4953 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
4954 return x;
4955
4956 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
4957 if (elt == 0)
4958 return 0;
4959
4960 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4961 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
4962 return elt->exp;
4963 }
4964
7afe21cc
RK
4965 return 0;
4966}
4967\f
4968/* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
4969 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
4970 least-significant part of X.
4971 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
4972
4973 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
4974
4975 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
4976
4977rtx
4978gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
4979 enum machine_mode mode;
4980 register rtx x;
4981{
4982 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
4983
4984 if (result)
4985 return result;
4986 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
4987 {
4988 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
4989 register int offset = 0;
4990 rtx new;
4991
4992#if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
4993 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
4994 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
4995#endif
4996#if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4997 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
4998 is unchanged. */
4999 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5000 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5001#endif
5002 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5003 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5004 return 0;
5005 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5006 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5007 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5008 return new;
5009 }
5010 else
5011 return 0;
5012}
5013\f
5014/* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5015 branch. It will be zero if not.
5016
5017 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5018 if we are following the taken case of
5019 if (i == 2)
5020 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5021
5022 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5023 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5024
5025static void
5026record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5027 rtx insn;
5028 int taken;
5029{
5030 int cond_known_true;
5031 rtx op0, op1;
5032 enum machine_mode mode;
5033 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5034 enum rtx_code code;
5035
5036 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5037 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5038 return;
5039
5040 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5041 if (taken)
5042 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5043 else
5044 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5045
5046 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5047 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5048 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5049 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5050 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5051 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5052
5053 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
5054 if (! cond_known_true)
5055 {
5056 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5057 code = reverse_condition (code);
5058 }
5059
5060 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5061 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
5062 if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
5063
5064 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5065}
5066
5067/* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5068 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5069 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5070 above function and called recursively. */
5071
5072static void
5073record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5074 enum rtx_code code;
5075 enum machine_mode mode;
5076 rtx op0, op1;
5077 int reversed_nonequality;
5078{
5079 int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
5080 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5081 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5082
5083 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5084 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5085 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5086 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5087
5088 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5089 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5090 {
5091 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5092 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5093
5094 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5095 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5096 reversed_nonequality);
5097 }
5098
5099 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5100 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5101 {
5102 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5103 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5104
5105 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5106 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5107 reversed_nonequality);
5108 }
5109
5110 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5111 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5112
5113 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5114 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5115 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5116 {
5117 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5118 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5119
5120 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5121 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5122 reversed_nonequality);
5123 }
5124
5125 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5126 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5127 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5128 {
5129 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5130 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5131
5132 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5133 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5134 reversed_nonequality);
5135 }
5136
5137 /* Hash both operands. */
5138
5139 do_not_record = 0;
5140 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5141 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5142 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5143 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5144 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5145
5146 if (do_not_record)
5147 return;
5148
5149 do_not_record = 0;
5150 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5151 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5152 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5153 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5154 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5155
5156 if (do_not_record)
5157 return;
5158
5159 /* Look up both operands. */
5160 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5161 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
5162
5163 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5164 comparison. */
5165 if (code != EQ)
5166 {
5167 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5168 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5169 do anything. */
5170
5171 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5172 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5173
5174 if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
5175 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5176 return;
5177
5178 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5179 new quantity number. */
5180 if (op0_elt == 0)
5181 {
5182 if (insert_regs (op0, 0, 0))
5183 {
5184 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5185 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5186 }
5187
5188 op0_elt = insert (op0, 0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5189 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5190 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5191 }
5192
5193 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5194 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5195 {
5196 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5197 if (op1_elt == 0)
5198 {
5199 if (insert_regs (op1, 0, 0))
5200 {
5201 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5202 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5203 }
5204
5205 op1_elt = insert (op1, 0, op1_hash_code, mode);
5206 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5207 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5208 }
5209
5210 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5211 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5212 }
5213 else
5214 {
5215 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5216 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5217 }
5218
5219 return;
5220 }
5221
5222 /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes. Save this class for
5223 `cse_set_around_loop'. */
5224 if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
5225 {
5226 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5227 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5228 }
5229
5230 /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one. */
5231 if (op0_elt == 0)
5232 {
5233 if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
5234 {
5235 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5236 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5237 }
5238
5239 op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
5240 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5241 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5242 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5243 }
5244
5245 if (op1_elt == 0)
5246 {
5247 if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
5248 {
5249 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5250 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5251 }
5252
5253 op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
5254 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5255 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5256 last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
5257 }
5258}
5259\f
5260/* CSE processing for one instruction.
5261 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5262 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5263 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5264 of available values.
5265
5266 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5267 the insn. */
5268
5269/* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5270
5271struct set
5272{
5273 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5274 rtx rtl;
5275 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5276 rtx src;
5277 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5278 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5279 /* Hash code for the SET_SRC. */
5280 int src_hash_code;
5281 /* Hash code for the SET_DEST. */
5282 int dest_hash_code;
5283 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5284 rtx inner_dest;
5285 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5286 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5287 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5288 char src_in_memory;
5289 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5290 char src_in_struct;
5291 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5292 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5293 char src_volatile;
5294 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5295 enum machine_mode mode;
5296 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5297 rtx src_const;
5298 /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5299 int src_const_hash_code;
5300 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5301 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5302};
5303
5304static void
5305cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5306 rtx insn;
5307 int in_libcall_block;
5308{
5309 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5310 rtx tem;
5311 register int i;
5312 register int n_sets = 0;
5313
5314 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5315 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5316 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5317 struct write_data writes_memory;
5318 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5319
5320 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5321 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5322 int src_eqv_volatile;
5323 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5324 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5325 int src_eqv_hash_code;
5326
5327 struct set *sets;
5328
5329 this_insn = insn;
5330 writes_memory = init;
5331
5332 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5333 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5334 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5335 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5336
5337 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5338 {
5339 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5340 sets[0].rtl = x;
5341
5342 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5343 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5344 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5345 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5346 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5347 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5348 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5349 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5350 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5351 ;
5352
5353 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5354 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5355 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5356 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5357 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg. */
5358
5359 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5360 {
5361 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5362 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5363 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5364 }
5365 else
5366 n_sets = 1;
5367 }
5368 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5369 {
5370 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5371
5372 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5373
5374 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5375 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5376 elsewhere in this insn.
5377 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5378 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5379 and we should not substitute some other register
5380 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5381 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
830a38ee 5382 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
7afe21cc
RK
5383 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5384 anything in that case. */
5385 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5386 {
5387 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
830a38ee
RS
5388 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER
5389 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5390 || GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == SUBREG))
7afe21cc
RK
5391 invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
5392 }
5393
5394 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5395 {
5396 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5397 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5398 {
5399 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
5400 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5401 {
5402 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5403 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5404 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5405 }
5406 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5407 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5408 ;
5409 else
5410 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5411 }
5412 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5413 {
5414 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
5415 and canon the address.
5416 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
5417 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
5418 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
5419 {
5420 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
5421 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
5422 }
5423 }
5424 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
5425 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5426 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5427 canon_reg (y, 0);
5428 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
5429 {
5430 canon_reg (y, insn);
5431 fold_rtx (y, insn);
5432 }
5433 }
5434 }
5435 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
5436 {
5437 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5438 {
5439 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5440 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
5441 }
5442 }
5443
5444 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
5445 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
5446 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
5447 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5448 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5449 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
5450 {
5451 canon_reg (x, insn);
5452 fold_rtx (x, insn);
5453 }
5454
5455 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
5456 {
5457 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different. */
5458 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
5459
5460 if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
5461 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), 0);
5462 }
5463
5464 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
5465 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
5466 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
5467 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
5468 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
5469 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
5470 (We also speed up that loop when a canonicalization was done since
5471 recog_memoized need not be called for just a canonicalization unless
5472 a pseudo register is being replaced by a hard reg of vice versa.)
5473
5474 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
5475 but we don't do this any more.
5476
5477 ??? The way this code is written now, if we have a MATCH_DUP between
5478 two operands that are pseudos and we would want to canonicalize them
5479 to a hard register, we won't do that. The only time this would happen
5480 is if the hard reg was a fixed register, and this should be rare.
5481
5482 ??? This won't work if there is a MATCH_DUP between an input and an
5483 output, but these never worked and must be declared invalid. */
5484
5485 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5486 {
5487 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5488 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5489 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
5490
5491 if (GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
5492 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5493 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
5494 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 0);
5495 else
5496 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
5497
5498 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5499 {
5500 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
5501 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 0);
5502 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
5503 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 0);
5504 }
5505
5506 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5507 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5508 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5509 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5510
5511 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
5512 canon_reg (dest, insn);
5513 }
5514
5515 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
5516 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
5517 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
5518 in the rest of this function.
5519
5520 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
5521
5522 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5523 {
5524 register rtx src, dest;
5525 register rtx src_folded;
5526 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
5527 enum machine_mode mode;
5528 rtx src_eqv_here;
5529 rtx src_const = 0;
5530 rtx src_related = 0;
5531 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
5532 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5533 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
5534 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
5535 contents of src_folded before using it. */
5536 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
5537
5538 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5539 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5540
5541 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
5542 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
5543 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
5544
5545 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5546 sets[i].mode = mode;
5547
5548 if (src_eqv)
5549 {
5550 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
5551 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5552 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5553 do_not_record = 0;
5554 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5555 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5556 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
5557 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5558
5559 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
5560
5561 if (!do_not_record)
5562 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
5563
5564 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
5565 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5566 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5567 }
5568
5569 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
5570 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
5571 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
5572 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5573 src_eqv_here = 0;
5574 else
5575 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
5576
5577 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
5578 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
5579 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
5580
5581 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
5582 so we will be able to record it later. */
5583 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5584 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5585 {
5586 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5587
5588 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
5589 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
5590 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
5591 && (INTVAL (src) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
5592 src_folded = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
5593 INTVAL (src) & ((1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
5594 }
5595
5596 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
5597 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
5598 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
5599 do_not_record = 0;
5600 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5601 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5602
5603 sets[i].src = src;
5604 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5605 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5606 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5607 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5608
5609 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
5610 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
5611 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
5612 in general. */
5613 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5614 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
5615 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
5616 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
5617
5618 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
5619 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
5620
5621 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
5622 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
5623 to a constant.
5624
5625 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
5626 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
5627 the same class; we check for this).
5628
5629 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
5630
5631 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
5632 REG_NOTE. */
5633
5634 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
5635 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
5636
5637 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
5638
5639 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
5640 {
5641 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
5642 {
5643 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
5644 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
5645 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
5646 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
5647 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
5648 }
5649
5650 src_eqv_here = 0;
5651 }
5652
5653 else if (src_eqv_elt)
5654 elt = src_eqv_elt;
5655
5656 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
5657 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
5658 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
5659 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code'). */
5660 if (elt)
5661 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5662 if (p->is_const)
5663 {
5664 src_const = p->exp;
5665 src_const_elt = elt;
5666 break;
5667 }
5668
5669 if (src_const == 0
5670 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
5671 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
5672 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
5673 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
5674 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
5675 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
5676 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5677 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
5678 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
5679 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5680
5681 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
5682 hash code and look it up. */
5683 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
5684 {
5685 sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
5686 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
5687 mode);
5688 }
5689
5690 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
5691 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
5692
5693 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
5694 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
5695 isn't, set ELT to it. */
5696 if (src_const_elt && elt
5697 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
5698 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
5699 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
5700 elt = src_const_elt;
5701
5702 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
5703 equivalent of SRC. */
5704 if (src_const
5705 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5706 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
5707 {
5708 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
5709 if (src_related)
5710 {
5711 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
5712 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
5713 if (src_related_elt && elt)
5714 {
5715 if (elt->first_same_value
5716 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
5717 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
5718 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
5719 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
5720 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
5721
5722 src_related = 0;
5723 src_related_elt = 0;
5724 }
5725 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
5726 elt = src_related_elt;
5727 }
5728 }
5729
d45cf215
RS
5730 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
5731 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
5732 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
5733 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
5734 value. */
5735
5736 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
5737 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
5738 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
5739 {
5740 enum machine_mode tmode;
5741 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, 0, XEXP (src, 1));
5742
5743 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
5744 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
5745 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
5746 {
5747 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
5748 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
5749
5750 if (inner)
5751 {
5752 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
5753 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
5754 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
5755 if (larger_elt == 0)
5756 continue;
5757
5758 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
5759 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
5760 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
5761 {
5762 src_related
5763 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
5764 break;
5765 }
5766
5767 if (src_related)
5768 break;
5769 }
5770 }
5771 }
5772
7afe21cc
RK
5773 if (src == src_folded)
5774 src_folded = 0;
5775
5776 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
5777 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
5778 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
5779 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
5780 already in the equivalence class.
5781
5782 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
5783 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
5784 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
5785 `src_related'. */
5786
5787 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
5788 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5789 {
5790 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
5791
5792 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
5793 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
5794 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
5795 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
5796 continue;
5797
5798 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
5799 src = 0;
5800 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
5801 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
5802 src_folded = 0;
5803 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
5804 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
5805 src_eqv_here = 0;
5806 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
5807 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
5808 src_related = 0;
5809
5810 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
5811 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
5812 then give it a negative cost. */
5813 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
5814 src_related = dest;
5815
5816 }
5817
5818 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
5819 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
5820 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
5821 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
05c33dd8 5822 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
7afe21cc
RK
5823 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
5824 if (src)
5825 {
5826 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
5827 src_cost = -1;
5828 else
5829 src_cost = COST (src);
5830 }
5831
5832 if (src_eqv_here)
5833 {
5834 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
5835 src_eqv_cost = -1;
5836 else
5837 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
5838 }
5839
5840 if (src_folded)
5841 {
5842 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
5843 src_folded_cost = -1;
5844 else
5845 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
5846 }
5847
5848 if (src_related)
5849 {
5850 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
5851 src_related_cost = -1;
5852 else
5853 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
5854 }
5855
5856 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
5857 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
5858 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
5859 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
5860
5861 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
5862 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
5863 while (1)
5864 {
5865 rtx trial;
5866
5867 /* Skip invalid entries. */
5868 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
5869 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
5870 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5871
5872 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
5873
5874 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
5875 of equal cost, use this order:
5876 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
5877 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
5878 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5879 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
5880 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5881 {
5882 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5883 if (src_folded_force_flag)
5884 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
5885 }
5886 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5887 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
5888 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5889 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
5890 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
5891 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5892 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
5893 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5894 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
5895 else
5896 {
05c33dd8 5897 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
7afe21cc
RK
5898 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5899 src_elt_cost = 10000;
5900 }
5901
5902 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
5903 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
5904 insn below.
5905
5906 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
5907 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
5908 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
5909 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
5910 the insn later. */
5911
5912 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
5913 && (trial == pc_rtx
5914 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5915 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
5916 {
5917 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
5918 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
5919 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
5920 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
5921 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
5922 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
5923 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
5924 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
5925
5926 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
5927
5928 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5929 break;
5930 }
5931
5932 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
5933 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
05c33dd8
RK
5934 {
5935 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
5936 break;
5937 }
7afe21cc
RK
5938
5939 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
5940 constants and this is a constant, try making a
5941 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
5942 this since that is where it likely came from. */
5943
5944 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
5945 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
5946 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
5947 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
5948 {
5949 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
5950 src_folded = trial;
5951 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
5952 }
5953 }
5954
5955 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5956
5957 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
5958 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
5959 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
5960 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
5961 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
5962 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
5963 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
5964 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
5965 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
5966 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
5967 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
5968 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
5969 SET_SRC. */
5970 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
5971 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5972 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
5973 SRC is a hard register. */
5974 {
5975 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
5976
5977 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
5978 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
5979 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
5980
5981 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
5982 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
5983 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
5984 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
5985 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
5986 src = src_const;
5987 }
5988
5989 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
5990 if (src != sets[i].src)
5991 {
5992 do_not_record = 0;
5993 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5994 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5995 sets[i].src = src;
5996 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5997 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5998 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5999 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6000 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6001 }
6002
6003 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6004 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6005 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
d45cf215 6006 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
7afe21cc
RK
6007 won't help anything. */
6008 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6009 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6010 {
6011 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
6012
6013 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6014 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6015 if (tem)
6016 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6017 else
6018 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6019 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6020
6021 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6022 previously held the constant value 0,
6023 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6024
6025 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6026 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6027 insn that set that register to zero.
6028
6029 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6030 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6031
6032 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6033 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6034 {
6035 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
6036 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6037 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6038
6039 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6040 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6041 {
6042 if (note)
6043 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6044 else
6045 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6046 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6047 }
6048 }
6049 }
6050
6051 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6052 do_not_record = 0;
6053 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6054
6055 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6056 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6057 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6058 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6059 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6060 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6061 {
6062 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6063 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6064 }
6065
6066 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6067
6068 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6069 {
6070 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6071
6072 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6073 or just things at non-fixed places.
6074 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6075 because we don't know how long it is. */
6076 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6077 }
6078
6079 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6080 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6081 since the register values used in the address computation
6082 are those before this instruction. */
6083 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
6084
6085 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6086 because the value in it after the store
6087 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6088
6089 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6090 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6091 {
6092 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6093
6094 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6095 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6096 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
6097 && ! (INTVAL (src_const) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6098 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6099 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6100 ;
6101 else
6102 {
6103 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6104 but no new value will be recorded.
6105 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6106 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6107 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6108 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6109 src_eqv = 0;
6110 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6111 }
6112 }
6113
6114 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6115 the insn. */
6116 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6117 {
6118 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6119 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6120 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6121 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6122 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6123 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6124 /* No more processing for this set. */
6125 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6126 }
6127
6128 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6129 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6130 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6131 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6132 {
6133 rtx p;
6134
6135 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6136 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6137 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6138 {
6139 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6140 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6141 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6142 delete_insn (insn);
6143 insn = new;
6144 }
6145
6146 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6147 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6148 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6149 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6150 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6151
6152 p = insn;
6153
6154 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6155 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6156 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6157 {
6158 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6159 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6160 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6161 else
6162 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6163 }
6164
6165 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6166 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6167 BARRIER. */
6168
6169 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6170 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6171 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6172
6173 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6174 one if so. */
6175
538b78e7
RS
6176 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6177 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
6178 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6179
6180 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6181 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6182 }
6183
c2a47e48
RK
6184 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6185 processing for this assignment. */
7afe21cc
RK
6186
6187 else if (do_not_record)
c2a47e48
RK
6188 {
6189 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6190 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6191 invalidate (dest);
6192 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6193 }
7afe21cc
RK
6194
6195 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6196 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6197
6198#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6199 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6200 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6201 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6202 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6203 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6204 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6205 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6206 {
6207 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6208 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6209 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
6210 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6211 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6212 }
6213#endif
6214 }
6215
6216 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6217 if they are not already present.
6218 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6219 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6220 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6221 (having been invalidated). */
6222
6223 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6224 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6225 {
6226 register struct table_elt *elt;
6227 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6228 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6229 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6230
6231 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6232 {
6233 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6234 classp = 0;
6235 }
6236 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6237 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6238 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
6239 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6240 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6241 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6242 }
6243
6244 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6245 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6246 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6247 {
6248 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6249 {
6250 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6251 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6252 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6253 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6254 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6255 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6256 sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
6257 }
6258 else
6259 {
6260 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6261 already present. */
6262 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6263 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6264 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6265 enum machine_mode mode
6266 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6267
6268 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6269 {
6270 register struct table_elt *elt;
6271
6272 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6273 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6274 match if not still valid. */
6275 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
6276 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6277 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6278 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6279 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6280 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6281 }
6282
6283 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6284 && src != sets[i].src_const
6285 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6286 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
6287 sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
6288 }
6289 }
6290 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6291 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6292 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6293 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6294 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6295
6296 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
6297 /* Memory, and some registers, are invalidate by subroutine calls. */
6298 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6299 {
6300 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6301 invalidate_memory (&everything);
6302 invalidate_for_call ();
6303 }
6304
6305 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
6306 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
6307 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
6308 a part of which is being set. */
6309
6310 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6311 if (sets[i].rtl)
6312 {
6313 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
6314
6315 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
6316 previous quantity's chain.
6317 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
6318 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
6319 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6320 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6321 invalidate (dest);
6322 }
6323
6324 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
6325 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
6326 This removes from the hash table
6327 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
6328
6329 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
6330 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
6331
6332 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6333 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
6334 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6335
6336 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
6337 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
6338
6339 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6340 if (sets[i].rtl)
6341 {
6342 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
6343 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
6344 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
6345 {
6346 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
6347
6348 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
6349 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
6350
6351 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
6352 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6353 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
6354 }
6355 }
6356
6357 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
6358
6359 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6360 if (sets[i].rtl)
6361 {
6362 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6363 register struct table_elt *elt;
6364
6365 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
6366 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
6367 memory. */
6368 if ((flag_float_store
6369 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6370 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6371 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
6372 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
6373 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
6374 here. */
6375 || in_libcall_block
6376 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
6377 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
6378 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6379 continue;
6380
6381 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
6382 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
6383 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
6384 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6385 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
6386
c610adec 6387 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
7afe21cc
RK
6388 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
6389 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
6390 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
6391 recalculated. */
6392 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
6393
6394 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
6395 sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
6396 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
6397 if (elt->in_memory)
6398 {
6399 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
6400 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
6401 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
6402 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6403 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6404 }
6405
fc3ffe83
RK
6406 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6407 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6408 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6409 make that equivalence as well.
7afe21cc
RK
6410
6411 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
6412 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
6413 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6414 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6415 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6416 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6417
6418 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6419 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6420
6421 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
fc3ffe83
RK
6422 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
6423 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7afe21cc
RK
6424 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
6425 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
6426 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6427 {
6428 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6429 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6430
6431 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6432 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6433 {
6434 rtx new_src = 0;
6435 int src_hash;
6436 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6437
6438 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6439 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6440 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6441 continue;
6442
6443 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
6444 if (new_src == 0)
6445 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
6446
6447 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6448 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6449
6450 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6451 already. */
6452 if (src_elt == 0)
6453 {
6454 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6455 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6456 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6457 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6458 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
6459 }
6460 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6461 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6462 actually the same. */
6463 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6464
6465 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6466 }
6467 }
6468 }
6469
6470 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
6471 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
6472 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
6473 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
6474 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
6475 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
6476 for later optimizations.
6477
6478 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6479 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6480 into a three-operand insn.
6481
6482 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6483
6484 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6485 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
6486 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6487 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6488 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
6489 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
6490 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
6491 {
6492 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
6493 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
6494 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
6495
6496 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
6497 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6498 {
6499 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6500 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, 0);
6501
6502 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
6503 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
6504 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
6505 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
6506 apply_change_group ();
6507
6508 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
6509 if (note)
6510 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
6511
6512 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
6513 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
6514 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6515 if (note)
6516 remove_note (prev, note);
6517
6518 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6519 if (note)
6520 {
6521 remove_note (insn, note);
6522 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
6523 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
6524 }
6525 }
6526 }
6527
6528 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
6529 the condition being tested. */
6530
6531 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
6532 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
6533 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
6534 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
6535 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
6536
6537#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6538 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
6539 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
6540 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
6541 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
6542 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
6543 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
6544 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
6545 {
6546 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
6547 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6548 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
6549 }
6550
6551 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
6552 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
6553#endif
6554
6555 prev_insn = insn;
6556}
6557\f
6558/* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
6559 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
6560 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
6561
6562static void
6563note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
6564 rtx written;
6565 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
6566{
6567 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6568
6569 if (written == 0)
6570 *writes_ptr = everything;
6571 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
6572 {
6573 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
6574 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
6575 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6576 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6577 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
6578 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
6579 {
6580 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
6581 return;
6582 }
6583 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
6584 *writes_ptr = everything;
6585 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
6586 {
6587 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
6588 and that's just as good as a structure element
6589 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables. */
6590 if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
6591 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
6592 writes_ptr->all = 1;
6593 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
6594 }
6595 writes_ptr->var = 1;
6596 }
6597}
6598
6599/* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
6600 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6601 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6602 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
6603
6604 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
6605 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
6606 X is the pattern of the insn. */
6607
6608static void
6609invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
6610 struct write_data *w;
6611 rtx x;
6612{
6613 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
6614 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
6615 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
6616 if (w->var)
6617 invalidate_memory (w);
6618
6619 if (w->sp)
6620 {
6621 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
6622 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
6623
6624 /* This should be *very* rare. */
6625 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
6626 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
6627 }
6628
6629 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6630 {
6631 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6632 if (ref
6633 && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6634 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
6635 invalidate (ref);
6636 }
6637 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6638 {
6639 register int i;
6640 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6641 {
6642 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6643 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6644 {
6645 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6646 if (ref
6647 &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6648 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
6649 invalidate (ref);
6650 }
6651 }
6652 }
6653}
6654\f
6655/* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
6656 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
6657 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
6658 only do this if the address remains valid.
6659
6660 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
6661
6662 Return the replacement for X. */
6663
6664static rtx
6665cse_process_notes (x, object)
6666 rtx x;
6667 rtx object;
6668{
6669 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6670 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6671 int qty;
6672 int i;
6673
6674 switch (code)
6675 {
6676 case CONST_INT:
6677 case CONST:
6678 case SYMBOL_REF:
6679 case LABEL_REF:
6680 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6681 case PC:
6682 case CC0:
6683 case LO_SUM:
6684 return x;
6685
6686 case MEM:
6687 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
6688 return x;
6689
6690 case EXPR_LIST:
6691 case INSN_LIST:
6692 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
6693 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
6694 if (XEXP (x, 1))
6695 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
6696 return x;
6697
e4890d45
RS
6698 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6699 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6700 {
6701 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
6702 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6703 since they would impede folding. */
6704 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
6705 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
6706 return x;
6707 }
6708
7afe21cc
RK
6709 case REG:
6710 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
6711
6712 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
6713 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
6714 && qty_const[i] != 0
6715 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
6716 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
6717 {
6718 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
6719 if (new)
6720 return new;
6721 }
6722
6723 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
6724 return canon_reg (x, 0);
6725 }
6726
6727 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
6728 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6729 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
6730 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
6731
6732 return x;
6733}
6734\f
6735/* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
6736 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
6737
6738 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
6739 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
6740 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
6741 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
6742 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
6743
6744 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
6745 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
6746 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
6747 jumps to a label used only once. */
6748
6749static void
6750cse_around_loop (loop_start)
6751 rtx loop_start;
6752{
6753 rtx insn;
6754 int i;
6755 struct table_elt *p;
6756
6757 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
6758 do anything. */
6759 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
6760 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
6761 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
6762 ;
6763
6764 if (insn == 0
6765 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
6766 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
6767 return;
6768
6769 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
6770 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
6771 the loop. Any equivalances resulting from that comparison are
6772 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
6773 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
6774 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
6775 p = p->next_same_value)
6776 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
6777 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
6778 invalidate (p->exp);
6779
6780 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
6781 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
6782
6783 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
6784 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
6785 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
6786
6787 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
6788 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
6789 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
6790 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
6791 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6792 {
6793 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6794 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
6795 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
6796 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
6797 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6798 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6799 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6800 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
6801 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
6802 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
6803 loop_start);
6804 }
6805}
6806\f
8b3686ed
RK
6807/* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
6808
6809static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
6810
6811/* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
6812 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
6813
6814static void
6815invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
6816 rtx set;
6817 rtx dest;
6818{
6819 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
6820#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6821 || dest == cc0_rtx
6822#endif
6823 || dest == pc_rtx)
6824 return;
6825
6826 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6827 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
6828
6829 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6830 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6831 invalidate (dest);
6832}
6833
6834/* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
6835 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
6836 conditionally executed. */
6837
6838static void
6839invalidate_skipped_block (start)
6840 rtx start;
6841{
6842 rtx insn;
6843 int i;
6844 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
6845 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6846
6847 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
6848 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6849 {
6850 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
6851 continue;
6852
6853 skipped_writes_memory = init;
6854
6855 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6856 {
6857 invalidate_for_call ();
6858 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
6859 }
6860
6861 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
6862 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
6863 }
6864}
6865\f
7afe21cc
RK
6866/* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
6867 value to be checked for modification. */
6868
6869static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
6870
6871/* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
6872 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
6873
6874static void
6875cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
6876 rtx x;
6877 rtx set;
6878{
6879 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
6880 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
6881 return;
6882
6883 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
6884 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
6885 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
6886}
6887
6888/* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
6889 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
6890
6891 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
6892 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
6893 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
6894
6895 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
6896 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
6897 retains its value at the start of the loop.
6898
6899 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
6900 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
6901 register.
6902
6903 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
6904
6905static void
6906cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
6907 rtx x;
6908 rtx insn;
6909 rtx loop_start;
6910{
6911 rtx p;
6912 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6913 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
6914 struct write_data writes_memory;
6915
6916 writes_memory = init;
6917
6918 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
6919 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
6920 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
6921 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
6922 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
6923 {
6924 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
6925 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
6926 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
6927
6928 if (src_elt)
6929 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
6930 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
6931 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
6932 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
6933 {
6934 rtx p, set;
6935
6936 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
6937 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
6938 a label or CALL_INSN. */
6939
6940 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
6941 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
6942 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
6943 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
6944 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
6945 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
6946 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
6947 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
6948 {
6949 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
6950 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
6951 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
6952 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
6953 the hash table. */
6954 rtx q;
6955
6956 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
6957 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
6958 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
6959 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
6960
6961 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
6962 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
6963 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
6964 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
6965 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
6966 src_elt->exp, 0))
6967 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
6968 SET_DEST (set)),
6969 p);
6970 break;
6971 }
6972 }
6973 }
6974
6975 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
6976 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
6977
6978 if (writes_memory.var)
6979 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
6980
6981 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
6982 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
6983 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
6984 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
6985 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
6986}
6987\f
6988/* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
6989 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
6990 block, and the branch path.
6991
6992 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
6993 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
6994 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
8b3686ed 6995 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7afe21cc
RK
6996
6997 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
6998 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
6999 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7000 to construct the output branch path. */
7001
7002/* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
7003
7004#define PATHLENGTH 20
7005
7006struct cse_basic_block_data {
7007 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
7008 int low_cuid;
7009 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
7010 int high_cuid;
7011 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
7012 int nsets;
7013 /* Last insn in the block. */
7014 rtx last;
7015 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
7016 int path_size;
7017 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
7018 struct branch_path {
7019 /* The branch insn. */
7020 rtx branch;
8b3686ed
RK
7021 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
7022 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
7023 by a BARRIER. */
7024 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
7afe21cc
RK
7025 } path[PATHLENGTH];
7026};
7027
7028void
8b3686ed 7029cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7afe21cc
RK
7030 rtx insn;
7031 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7032 int follow_jumps;
7033 int after_loop;
8b3686ed 7034 int skip_blocks;
7afe21cc
RK
7035{
7036 rtx p = insn, q;
7037 int nsets = 0;
7038 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
fc3ffe83 7039 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7afe21cc
RK
7040 int path_size = data->path_size;
7041 int path_entry = 0;
7042 int i;
7043
7044 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7045 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7046 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7047 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7048 while (path_size > 0)
7049 {
8b3686ed 7050 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7051 {
7052 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7053 break;
7054 }
7055 else
7056 path_size--;
7057 }
7058
7059 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7060 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7061 {
7062 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7063 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7064 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7065 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7066 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7067 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7068 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7069 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7070 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7071
7072 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7073 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7074
7075 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7076 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7077 break;
7078
7079 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7080 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7081 a later time than the setjmp. */
7082 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7083 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7084 break;
7085
7086 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7087 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7088 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7089 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7090 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7091 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7092 nsets += 1;
7093
7094 if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
8b3686ed 7095 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7afe21cc 7096 if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
8b3686ed 7097 low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
7afe21cc
RK
7098
7099 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7100 take it, do so. */
7101 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7102 {
8b3686ed 7103 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7104 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7105
7106 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7107 path_entry++;
7108 }
7109
7110 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7111 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7112 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
8b3686ed
RK
7113 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7114
7115 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7116 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7117 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7118 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7119
7120 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7afe21cc
RK
7121 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7122 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7123 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7124 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7125 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7126 {
7127 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7128 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7129 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7130 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7131 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7132 break;
7133
7134 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7135 basic block when the branch is taken. */
8b3686ed 7136 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
7137 {
7138 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7139 always-executed loop. */
fc3ffe83
RK
7140 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7141 {
7142 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7143 continue;
7144 }
7afe21cc
RK
7145
7146 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7147 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7148 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7149 break;
7150
7151 if (i != path_entry)
7152 break;
7153
7154 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7155 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7156
7157 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7158 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7159 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7160 turned into a no-op). */
7161 path_size = path_entry;
7162
7163 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7164 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7165 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7166 }
8b3686ed
RK
7167 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7168 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7169 {
7170 register rtx tmp;
7171
fc3ffe83
RK
7172 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7173 {
7174 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7175 continue;
7176 }
8b3686ed
RK
7177
7178 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7179 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7180 break;
7181
7182 if (i != path_entry)
7183 break;
7184
7185 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7186 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7187 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7188 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7189 break;
7190
7191 if (tmp == q)
7192 {
7193 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7194 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7195
7196 path_size = path_entry;
7197
7198 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7199 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7200 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7201 }
7202 }
7afe21cc 7203 }
7afe21cc
RK
7204 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7205 }
7206
7207 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7208 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7209 data->nsets = nsets;
7210 data->last = p;
7211
7212 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7213 so a rescan won't be done. */
7214 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8b3686ed 7215 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7216 break;
7217
7218 if (i == -1)
7219 data->path_size = 0;
7220 else
7221 data->path_size = path_size;
7222
7223 /* End the current branch path. */
7224 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7225}
7226\f
7227static rtx cse_basic_block ();
7228
7229/* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7230 F is the first instruction.
7231 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7232
7233 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7234 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7235
7236 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7237 in conditional jump instructions. */
7238
7239int
7240cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7241 rtx f;
7242 int nregs;
7243 int after_loop;
7244 FILE *file;
7245{
7246 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7247 register rtx insn = f;
7248 register int i;
7249
7250 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7251 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7252 val.path_size = 0;
7253
7254 init_recog ();
7255
7256 max_reg = nregs;
7257
7258 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7259 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7260
7261 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7262 {
7263 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7264 consec_ints[i] = i;
7265 }
7266
7267 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7268 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7269 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7270 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7271 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7272
7273 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7274 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7275 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7276 free_element_chain = 0;
7277 n_elements_made = 0;
7278
7279 /* Find the largest uid. */
7280
7281 i = get_max_uid ();
7282 uid_cuid = (short *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7283 bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7284
7285 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
7286 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
7287 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
7288 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
7289 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
7290
7291 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7292 {
7293 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7294 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
7295 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
7296 else
7297 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
7298 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
7299 }
7300
7301 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
7302
7303 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
7304
7305 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
7306 if ((call_used_regs[i]
7307 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
7308 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
7309 confused if they can "live across calls".
7310
7311 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
7312 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
7313 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
7314 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
7315 table register is preserved across calls. */
7316
7317 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7318 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7319#if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7320 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
7321#endif
7322#ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7323 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
7324#endif
7325 )
7326 || global_regs[i])
7327 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
7328
7329 /* Loop over basic blocks.
7330 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
7331 (which is 2 for each SET). */
7332 insn = f;
7333 while (insn)
7334 {
8b3686ed
RK
7335 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
7336 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7afe21cc
RK
7337
7338 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
7339 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7340 {
7341 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7342 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
7343 val.path_size = 0;
7344 continue;
7345 }
7346
7347 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7348 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7349 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
7350
7351 if (file)
7352 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
7353 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
7354 val.nsets);
7355
7356 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
7357 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
7358 if (max_qty < 500)
7359 max_qty = 500;
7360
7361 max_qty += max_reg;
7362
7363 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
7364 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
7365 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
7366 if (val.path_size > 0)
7367 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
7368 else
7369 {
7370 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
7371 rtx temp;
7372
7373 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
7374 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
7375 us a new branch path to investigate. */
7376 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7377 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
8b3686ed
RK
7378 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
7379 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7380 insn = temp;
7381
7382 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
7383 }
7384
7385#ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
7386 alloca (0);
7387#endif
7388 }
7389
7390 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
7391 qty_const = 0;
7392
7393 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
7394 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
7395
7396 return cse_jumps_altered;
7397}
7398
7399/* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
7400 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
7401 a null path when not following jumps.
7402
7403 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
7404 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
7405 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
7406
7407static rtx
7408cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
7409 register rtx from, to;
7410 struct branch_path *next_branch;
7411 int around_loop;
7412{
7413 register rtx insn;
7414 int to_usage = 0;
7415 int in_libcall_block = 0;
7416
7417 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
7418 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
7419
7420 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7421 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7422 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
7423 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7424 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7425 qty_comparison_code
7426 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
7427 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7428 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7429
7430 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
7431 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
7432 qty_mode -= max_reg;
7433 qty_const -= max_reg;
7434 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
7435 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
7436 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
7437 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
7438
7439 new_basic_block ();
7440
7441 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
7442 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7443 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7444
7445 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7446 {
7447 register enum rtx_code code;
7448
7449 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
7450 to be taken, do so. */
7451 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
7452 {
8b3686ed
RK
7453 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
7454 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc 7455 {
8b3686ed
RK
7456 if (status == TAKEN)
7457 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
7458 else
7459 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
7460
7afe21cc
RK
7461 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
7462 Then follow this branch. */
7463#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7464 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
7465#endif
7466 prev_insn = insn;
7467 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
7468 continue;
7469 }
7470 }
7471
7472 code = GET_CODE (insn);
7473 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7474 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7475
7476 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
7477 {
7478 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
7479 looking for duplicate operations. */
7480
7481 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
7482 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), 0);
7483
7484 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
7485 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
7486 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
830a38ee 7487 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7afe21cc
RK
7488 recorded. */
7489
7490 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
7491 in_libcall_block = 1;
7492 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
7493 in_libcall_block = 0;
7494
7495 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
7496 }
7497
7498 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
7499 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
7500 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
7501 that we can have one usage of TO. */
7502
7503 if (simplejump_p (insn))
7504 {
7505 if (to == 0)
7506 return 0;
7507
7508 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
7509 to_usage = 1;
7510
6a5293dc
RS
7511 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
7512 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
7513 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
7514 to whatever follows this insn,
7515 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
7516 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
7517 break;
7518
7afe21cc
RK
7519 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
7520 }
7521
7522 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
7523 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
d45cf215 7524 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7afe21cc
RK
7525 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
7526 want to count the use in that jump. */
7527
7528 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
7529 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
7530 {
7531 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7532
7533 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
7534
7535 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
7536 delete_insn (to);
7537
7538 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
7539 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
7540 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
d45cf215 7541 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
7afe21cc
RK
7542 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
7543 has no continuation. */
7544
7545 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
7546 return 0;
7547
7548 to_usage = 0;
7549 val.path_size = 0;
8b3686ed 7550 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
7afe21cc
RK
7551
7552 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
7553 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
7554 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
7555 and that block will be scanned individually. */
7556 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
7557 break;
7558
7559 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7560 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7561 to = val.last;
7562
7563 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
7564 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7565 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7566
7567 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
7568 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
7569 }
7570 }
7571
7572 if (next_qty > max_qty)
7573 abort ();
7574
7575 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
7576 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
7577 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
7578 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
7579
8b3686ed
RK
7580 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
7581 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7582 && around_loop && to != 0
7583 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7584 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
7585 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
7586 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
7587 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
7588
7589 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
7590}
7591\f
7592/* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
7593 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
7594 we count each register usage. */
7595
7596static void
7597count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
7598 rtx x;
7599 int *counts;
7600 int incr;
7601{
7602 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7603 char *fmt;
7604 int i, j;
7605
7606 switch (code)
7607 {
7608 case REG:
7609 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
7610 return;
7611
7612 case PC:
7613 case CC0:
7614 case CONST:
7615 case CONST_INT:
7616 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7617 case SYMBOL_REF:
7618 case LABEL_REF:
7619 case CLOBBER:
7620 return;
7621
7622 case SET:
7623 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
7624 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
7625 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
7626 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
7627 return;
7628
7629 case INSN:
7630 case JUMP_INSN:
7631 case CALL_INSN:
7632 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
7633
7634 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
7635 use them. */
7636
7637 if (REG_NOTES (x))
7638 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
7639 return;
7640
7641 case EXPR_LIST:
7642 case INSN_LIST:
7643 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7644 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
7645 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7646 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
7647 return;
7648 }
7649
7650 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7651 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7652 {
7653 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7654 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
7655 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
7656 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
7657 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
7658 }
7659}
7660\f
7661/* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7662 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7663
7664 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
7665 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
7666 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
7667 are also sped up. */
7668
7669void
7670delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
7671 rtx insns;
7672 int nreg;
7673{
7674 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
7675 rtx insn;
d45cf215 7676 rtx tem;
7afe21cc 7677 int i;
e4890d45 7678 int in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
7679
7680 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
7681 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
7682 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
7683 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
7684
7685 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7686 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
7687 usage counts for registers it uses. */
7688 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ());
7689 insn; insn = prev_real_insn (insn))
7690 {
7691 int live_insn = 0;
7692
e4890d45
RS
7693 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
7694 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. */
7695 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
7696 in_libcall = 1;
7697
7698 if (in_libcall)
7699 live_insn = 1;
7700 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
7afe21cc
RK
7701 {
7702 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
7703 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7704 ;
7705
d45cf215
RS
7706#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7707 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
7708 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7709 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7710 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7711 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7712 ;
7713#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7714 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
7715 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7716 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
7717 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
7718 live_insn = 1;
7719 }
7720 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7721 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7722 {
7723 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
7724
7725 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
7726 {
7727 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
7728 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
7729 ;
7730
d45cf215
RS
7731#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7732 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
7733 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
7734 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7735 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7736 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7737 ;
7738#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7739 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
7740 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7741 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
7742 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
7743 live_insn = 1;
7744 }
7745 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
7746 live_insn = 1;
7747 }
7748 else
7749 live_insn = 1;
7750
7751 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
e4890d45 7752 being used. */
7afe21cc 7753
e4890d45 7754 if (! live_insn)
7afe21cc
RK
7755 {
7756 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
7757 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
7758 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
7759 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
7760 }
e4890d45
RS
7761
7762 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
7763 in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
7764 }
7765}